1 | // Licensed to the .NET Foundation under one or more agreements. |
2 | // The .NET Foundation licenses this file to you under the MIT license. |
3 | // See the LICENSE file in the project root for more information. |
4 | |
5 | /*XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX |
6 | XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX |
7 | XX XX |
8 | XX emit.cpp XX |
9 | XX XX |
10 | XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX |
11 | XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX |
12 | */ |
13 | |
14 | #include "jitpch.h" |
15 | #ifdef _MSC_VER |
16 | #pragma hdrstop |
17 | #endif |
18 | |
19 | #include "hostallocator.h" |
20 | #include "instr.h" |
21 | #include "emit.h" |
22 | #include "codegen.h" |
23 | |
24 | /***************************************************************************** |
25 | * |
26 | * Represent an emitter location. |
27 | */ |
28 | |
29 | void emitLocation::CaptureLocation(emitter* emit) |
30 | { |
31 | ig = emit->emitCurIG; |
32 | codePos = emit->emitCurOffset(); |
33 | |
34 | assert(Valid()); |
35 | } |
36 | |
37 | bool emitLocation::IsCurrentLocation(emitter* emit) const |
38 | { |
39 | assert(Valid()); |
40 | return (ig == emit->emitCurIG) && (codePos == emit->emitCurOffset()); |
41 | } |
42 | |
43 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitLocation::CodeOffset(emitter* emit) const |
44 | { |
45 | assert(Valid()); |
46 | return emit->emitCodeOffset(ig, codePos); |
47 | } |
48 | |
49 | int emitLocation::GetInsNum() const |
50 | { |
51 | return emitGetInsNumFromCodePos(codePos); |
52 | } |
53 | |
54 | // Get the instruction offset in the current instruction group, which must be a funclet prolog group. |
55 | // This is used to find an instruction offset used in unwind data. |
56 | // TODO-AMD64-Bug?: We only support a single main function prolog group, but allow for multiple funclet prolog |
57 | // groups (not that we actually use that flexibility, since the funclet prolog will be small). How to |
58 | // handle that? |
59 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitLocation::GetFuncletPrologOffset(emitter* emit) const |
60 | { |
61 | assert(ig->igFuncIdx != 0); |
62 | assert((ig->igFlags & IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG) != 0); |
63 | assert(ig == emit->emitCurIG); |
64 | |
65 | return emit->emitCurIGsize; |
66 | } |
67 | |
68 | #ifdef DEBUG |
69 | void emitLocation::Print() const |
70 | { |
71 | unsigned insNum = emitGetInsNumFromCodePos(codePos); |
72 | unsigned insOfs = emitGetInsOfsFromCodePos(codePos); |
73 | printf("(G_M%03u_IG%02u,ins#%d,ofs#%d)" , Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, ig->igNum, insNum, insOfs); |
74 | } |
75 | #endif // DEBUG |
76 | |
77 | /***************************************************************************** |
78 | * |
79 | * Return the name of an instruction format. |
80 | */ |
81 | |
82 | #if defined(DEBUG) || EMITTER_STATS |
83 | |
84 | const char* emitter::emitIfName(unsigned f) |
85 | { |
86 | static const char* const ifNames[] = { |
87 | #define IF_DEF(en, op1, op2) "IF_" #en, |
88 | #include "emitfmts.h" |
89 | }; |
90 | |
91 | static char errBuff[32]; |
92 | |
93 | if (f < _countof(ifNames)) |
94 | { |
95 | return ifNames[f]; |
96 | } |
97 | |
98 | sprintf_s(errBuff, sizeof(errBuff), "??%u??" , f); |
99 | return errBuff; |
100 | } |
101 | |
102 | #endif |
103 | |
104 | #ifdef TRANSLATE_PDB |
105 | |
106 | /* these are protected */ |
107 | |
108 | AddrMap* emitter::emitPDBOffsetTable = 0; |
109 | LocalMap* emitter::emitPDBLocalTable = 0; |
110 | bool emitter::emitIsPDBEnabled = true; |
111 | BYTE* emitter::emitILBaseOfCode = 0; |
112 | BYTE* emitter::emitILMethodBase = 0; |
113 | BYTE* emitter::emitILMethodStart = 0; |
114 | BYTE* emitter::emitImgBaseOfCode = 0; |
115 | |
116 | void emitter::MapCode(int ilOffset, BYTE* imgDest) |
117 | { |
118 | if (emitIsPDBEnabled) |
119 | { |
120 | emitPDBOffsetTable->MapSrcToDest(ilOffset, (int)(imgDest - emitImgBaseOfCode)); |
121 | } |
122 | } |
123 | |
124 | void emitter::MapFunc(int imgOff, |
125 | int procLen, |
126 | int dbgStart, |
127 | int dbgEnd, |
128 | short frameReg, |
129 | int stkAdjust, |
130 | int lvaCount, |
131 | OptJit::LclVarDsc* lvaTable, |
132 | bool framePtr) |
133 | { |
134 | if (emitIsPDBEnabled) |
135 | { |
136 | // this code stores information about local symbols for the PDB translation |
137 | |
138 | assert(lvaCount >= 0); // don't allow a negative count |
139 | |
140 | LvaDesc* rgLvaDesc = 0; |
141 | |
142 | if (lvaCount > 0) |
143 | { |
144 | rgLvaDesc = new LvaDesc[lvaCount]; |
145 | |
146 | if (!rgLvaDesc) |
147 | { |
148 | NOMEM(); |
149 | } |
150 | |
151 | LvaDesc* pDst = rgLvaDesc; |
152 | OptJit::LclVarDsc* pSrc = lvaTable; |
153 | for (int i = 0; i < lvaCount; ++i, ++pDst, ++pSrc) |
154 | { |
155 | pDst->slotNum = pSrc->lvSlotNum; |
156 | pDst->isReg = pSrc->lvRegister; |
157 | pDst->reg = (pSrc->lvRegister ? pSrc->lvRegNum : frameReg); |
158 | pDst->off = pSrc->lvStkOffs + stkAdjust; |
159 | } |
160 | } |
161 | |
162 | emitPDBLocalTable->AddFunc((int)(emitILMethodBase - emitILBaseOfCode), imgOff - (int)emitImgBaseOfCode, procLen, |
163 | dbgStart - imgOff, dbgEnd - imgOff, lvaCount, rgLvaDesc, framePtr); |
164 | // do not delete rgLvaDesc here -- responsibility is now on emitPDBLocalTable destructor |
165 | } |
166 | } |
167 | |
168 | /* these are public */ |
169 | |
170 | void emitter::SetILBaseOfCode(BYTE* pTextBase) |
171 | { |
172 | emitILBaseOfCode = pTextBase; |
173 | } |
174 | |
175 | void emitter::SetILMethodBase(BYTE* pMethodEntry) |
176 | { |
177 | emitILMethodBase = pMethodEntry; |
178 | } |
179 | |
180 | void emitter::SetILMethodStart(BYTE* pMethodCode) |
181 | { |
182 | emitILMethodStart = pMethodCode; |
183 | } |
184 | |
185 | void emitter::SetImgBaseOfCode(BYTE* pTextBase) |
186 | { |
187 | emitImgBaseOfCode = pTextBase; |
188 | } |
189 | |
190 | void emitter::SetIDBaseToProlog() |
191 | { |
192 | emitInstrDescILBase = (int)(emitILMethodBase - emitILBaseOfCode); |
193 | } |
194 | |
195 | void emitter::SetIDBaseToOffset(int methodOffset) |
196 | { |
197 | emitInstrDescILBase = methodOffset + (int)(emitILMethodStart - emitILBaseOfCode); |
198 | } |
199 | |
200 | void emitter::DisablePDBTranslation() |
201 | { |
202 | // this function should disable PDB translation code |
203 | emitIsPDBEnabled = false; |
204 | } |
205 | |
206 | bool emitter::IsPDBEnabled() |
207 | { |
208 | return emitIsPDBEnabled; |
209 | } |
210 | |
211 | void emitter::InitTranslationMaps(int ilCodeSize) |
212 | { |
213 | if (emitIsPDBEnabled) |
214 | { |
215 | emitPDBOffsetTable = AddrMap::Create(ilCodeSize); |
216 | emitPDBLocalTable = LocalMap::Create(); |
217 | } |
218 | } |
219 | |
220 | void emitter::DeleteTranslationMaps() |
221 | { |
222 | if (emitPDBOffsetTable) |
223 | { |
224 | delete emitPDBOffsetTable; |
225 | emitPDBOffsetTable = 0; |
226 | } |
227 | if (emitPDBLocalTable) |
228 | { |
229 | delete emitPDBLocalTable; |
230 | emitPDBLocalTable = 0; |
231 | } |
232 | } |
233 | |
234 | void emitter::InitTranslator(PDBRewriter* pPDB, int* rgSecMap, IMAGE_SECTION_HEADER** rgpHeader, int numSections) |
235 | { |
236 | if (emitIsPDBEnabled) |
237 | { |
238 | pPDB->InitMaps(rgSecMap, // new PE section header order |
239 | rgpHeader, // array of section headers |
240 | numSections, // number of sections |
241 | emitPDBOffsetTable, // code offset translation table |
242 | emitPDBLocalTable); // slot variable translation table |
243 | } |
244 | } |
245 | |
246 | #endif // TRANSLATE_PDB |
247 | |
248 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
249 | |
250 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
251 | |
252 | static unsigned totAllocdSize; |
253 | static unsigned totActualSize; |
254 | |
255 | unsigned emitter::emitIFcounts[emitter::IF_COUNT]; |
256 | |
257 | static unsigned emitSizeBuckets[] = {100, 1024 * 1, 1024 * 2, 1024 * 3, 1024 * 4, 1024 * 5, 1024 * 10, 0}; |
258 | static Histogram emitSizeTable(emitSizeBuckets); |
259 | |
260 | static unsigned GCrefsBuckets[] = {0, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 0}; |
261 | static Histogram GCrefsTable(GCrefsBuckets); |
262 | |
263 | static unsigned stkDepthBuckets[] = {0, 1, 2, 5, 10, 16, 32, 128, 1024, 0}; |
264 | static Histogram stkDepthTable(stkDepthBuckets); |
265 | |
266 | size_t emitter::emitSizeMethod; |
267 | |
268 | size_t emitter::emitTotMemAlloc; |
269 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalInsCnt; |
270 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalIGcnt; |
271 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalPhIGcnt; |
272 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalIGjmps; |
273 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalIGptrs; |
274 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalIGicnt; |
275 | size_t emitter::emitTotalIGsize; |
276 | unsigned emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt; |
277 | |
278 | unsigned emitter::emitSmallDspCnt; |
279 | unsigned emitter::emitLargeDspCnt; |
280 | |
281 | unsigned emitter::emitSmallCnsCnt; |
282 | unsigned emitter::emitLargeCnsCnt; |
283 | unsigned emitter::emitSmallCns[SMALL_CNS_TSZ]; |
284 | |
285 | void emitterStaticStats(FILE* fout) |
286 | { |
287 | // insGroup members |
288 | |
289 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
290 | fprintf(fout, "insGroup:\n" ); |
291 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igNext = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igNext)); |
292 | #ifdef DEBUG |
293 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igSelf = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igSelf)); |
294 | #endif |
295 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igNum = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igNum)); |
296 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igOffs = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igOffs)); |
297 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igFuncIdx = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igFuncIdx)); |
298 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igFlags = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igFlags)); |
299 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igSize = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igSize)); |
300 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igData = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igData)); |
301 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
302 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igStkLvl = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igStkLvl)); |
303 | #endif |
304 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igGCregs = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igGCregs)); |
305 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igInsCnt = %2u\n" , offsetof(insGroup, igInsCnt)); |
306 | fprintf(fout, "Size of insGroup = %u\n" , sizeof(insGroup)); |
307 | |
308 | // insPlaceholderGroupData members |
309 | |
310 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
311 | fprintf(fout, "insPlaceholderGroupData:\n" ); |
312 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhNext = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhNext)); |
313 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhBB = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhBB)); |
314 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhInitGCrefVars = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhInitGCrefVars)); |
315 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhInitGCrefRegs = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhInitGCrefRegs)); |
316 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhInitByrefRegs = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhInitByrefRegs)); |
317 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhPrevGCrefVars = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhPrevGCrefVars)); |
318 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhPrevGCrefRegs = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhPrevGCrefRegs)); |
319 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhPrevByrefRegs = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhPrevByrefRegs)); |
320 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of igPhType = %2u\n" , offsetof(insPlaceholderGroupData, igPhType)); |
321 | fprintf(fout, "Size of insPlaceholderGroupData = %u\n" , sizeof(insPlaceholderGroupData)); |
322 | |
323 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
324 | fprintf(fout, "Size of instrDesc = %2u\n" , sizeof(emitter::instrDesc)); |
325 | // fprintf(fout, "Offset of _idIns = %2u\n", offsetof(emitter::instrDesc, _idIns )); |
326 | // fprintf(fout, "Offset of _idInsFmt = %2u\n", offsetof(emitter::instrDesc, _idInsFmt )); |
327 | // fprintf(fout, "Offset of _idOpSize = %2u\n", offsetof(emitter::instrDesc, _idOpSize )); |
328 | // fprintf(fout, "Offset of idSmallCns = %2u\n", offsetof(emitter::instrDesc, idSmallCns )); |
329 | // fprintf(fout, "Offset of _idAddrUnion= %2u\n", offsetof(emitter::instrDesc, _idAddrUnion)); |
330 | // fprintf(fout, "\n"); |
331 | // fprintf(fout, "Size of _idAddrUnion= %2u\n", sizeof(((emitter::instrDesc*)0)->_idAddrUnion)); |
332 | |
333 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
334 | fprintf(fout, "GCInfo::regPtrDsc:\n" ); |
335 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of rpdNext = %2u\n" , offsetof(GCInfo::regPtrDsc, rpdNext)); |
336 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of rpdOffs = %2u\n" , offsetof(GCInfo::regPtrDsc, rpdOffs)); |
337 | fprintf(fout, "Offset of <union> = %2u\n" , offsetof(GCInfo::regPtrDsc, rpdPtrArg)); |
338 | fprintf(fout, "Size of GCInfo::regPtrDsc = %2u\n" , sizeof(GCInfo::regPtrDsc)); |
339 | |
340 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
341 | } |
342 | |
343 | void emitterStats(FILE* fout) |
344 | { |
345 | if (totAllocdSize > 0) |
346 | { |
347 | assert(totActualSize <= totAllocdSize); |
348 | |
349 | fprintf(fout, "\nTotal allocated code size = %u\n" , totAllocdSize); |
350 | |
351 | if (totActualSize < totAllocdSize) |
352 | { |
353 | fprintf(fout, "Total generated code size = %u " , totActualSize); |
354 | |
355 | fprintf(fout, "(%4.3f%% waste)" , 100 * ((totAllocdSize - totActualSize) / (double)totActualSize)); |
356 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
357 | } |
358 | |
359 | assert(emitter::emitTotalInsCnt); |
360 | |
361 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %4.2f bytes of code generated per instruction\n" , |
362 | (double)totActualSize / emitter::emitTotalInsCnt); |
363 | } |
364 | |
365 | fprintf(fout, "\nInstruction format frequency table:\n\n" ); |
366 | |
367 | unsigned f, ic = 0, dc = 0; |
368 | |
369 | for (f = 0; f < emitter::IF_COUNT; f++) |
370 | { |
371 | ic += emitter::emitIFcounts[f]; |
372 | } |
373 | |
374 | for (f = 0; f < emitter::IF_COUNT; f++) |
375 | { |
376 | unsigned c = emitter::emitIFcounts[f]; |
377 | |
378 | if ((c > 0) && (1000 * c >= ic)) |
379 | { |
380 | dc += c; |
381 | fprintf(fout, " %-13s %8u (%5.2f%%)\n" , emitter::emitIfName(f), c, 100.0 * c / ic); |
382 | } |
383 | } |
384 | |
385 | fprintf(fout, " --------------------------------\n" ); |
386 | fprintf(fout, " %-13s %8u (%5.2f%%)\n" , "Total shown" , dc, 100.0 * dc / ic); |
387 | |
388 | if (emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt) |
389 | { |
390 | fprintf(fout, "Total of %8u methods\n" , emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
391 | fprintf(fout, "Total of %8u insGroup\n" , emitter::emitTotalIGcnt); |
392 | fprintf(fout, "Total of %8u insPlaceholderGroupData\n" , emitter::emitTotalPhIGcnt); |
393 | fprintf(fout, "Total of %8u instructions\n" , emitter::emitTotalIGicnt); |
394 | fprintf(fout, "Total of %8u jumps\n" , emitter::emitTotalIGjmps); |
395 | fprintf(fout, "Total of %8u GC livesets\n" , emitter::emitTotalIGptrs); |
396 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
397 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf insGroup per method\n" , |
398 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGcnt / emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
399 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf insPhGroup per method\n" , |
400 | (double)emitter::emitTotalPhIGcnt / emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
401 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf instructions per method\n" , |
402 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGicnt / emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
403 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf desc. bytes per method\n" , |
404 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGsize / emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
405 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf jumps per method\n" , |
406 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGjmps / emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
407 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf GC livesets per method\n" , |
408 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGptrs / emitter::emitTotalIGmcnt); |
409 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
410 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf instructions per group \n" , |
411 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGicnt / emitter::emitTotalIGcnt); |
412 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf desc. bytes per group \n" , |
413 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGsize / emitter::emitTotalIGcnt); |
414 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf jumps per group \n" , |
415 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGjmps / emitter::emitTotalIGcnt); |
416 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
417 | fprintf(fout, "Average of %8.1lf bytes per instrDesc\n" , |
418 | (double)emitter::emitTotalIGsize / emitter::emitTotalIGicnt); |
419 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
420 | fprintf(fout, "A total of %8u desc. bytes\n" , emitter::emitTotalIGsize); |
421 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
422 | } |
423 | |
424 | fprintf(fout, "Descriptor size distribution:\n" ); |
425 | emitSizeTable.dump(fout); |
426 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
427 | |
428 | fprintf(fout, "GC ref frame variable counts:\n" ); |
429 | GCrefsTable.dump(fout); |
430 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
431 | |
432 | fprintf(fout, "Max. stack depth distribution:\n" ); |
433 | stkDepthTable.dump(fout); |
434 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
435 | |
436 | int i; |
437 | unsigned c; |
438 | unsigned m; |
439 | |
440 | if (emitter::emitSmallCnsCnt || emitter::emitLargeCnsCnt) |
441 | { |
442 | fprintf(fout, "SmallCnsCnt = %6u\n" , emitter::emitSmallCnsCnt); |
443 | fprintf(fout, "LargeCnsCnt = %6u (%3u %% of total)\n" , emitter::emitLargeCnsCnt, |
444 | 100 * emitter::emitLargeCnsCnt / (emitter::emitLargeCnsCnt + emitter::emitSmallCnsCnt)); |
445 | } |
446 | |
447 | #if 0 |
448 | // TODO-Cleanup: WHy is this in #if 0 - Is EMITTER_STATS ever used? Fix or delete this. |
449 | if (emitter::emitSmallCnsCnt) |
450 | { |
451 | fprintf(fout, "\n" ); |
452 | |
453 | m = emitter::emitSmallCnsCnt/1000 + 1; |
454 | |
455 | for (i = ID_MIN_SMALL_CNS; i < ID_MAX_SMALL_CNS; i++) |
456 | { |
457 | c = emitter::emitSmallCns[i-ID_MIN_SMALL_CNS]; |
458 | if (c >= m) |
459 | fprintf(fout, "cns[%4d] = %u\n" , i, c); |
460 | } |
461 | } |
462 | #endif // 0 |
463 | |
464 | fprintf(fout, "%8u bytes allocated in the emitter\n" , emitter::emitTotMemAlloc); |
465 | } |
466 | |
467 | #endif // EMITTER_STATS |
468 | |
469 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
470 | |
471 | const unsigned short emitTypeSizes[] = { |
472 | #define DEF_TP(tn, nm, jitType, verType, sz, sze, asze, st, al, tf, howUsed) sze, |
473 | #include "typelist.h" |
474 | #undef DEF_TP |
475 | }; |
476 | |
477 | const unsigned short emitTypeActSz[] = { |
478 | #define DEF_TP(tn, nm, jitType, verType, sz, sze, asze, st, al, tf, howUsed) asze, |
479 | #include "typelist.h" |
480 | #undef DEF_TP |
481 | }; |
482 | |
483 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
484 | /***************************************************************************** |
485 | * |
486 | * Initialize the emitter - called once, at DLL load time. |
487 | */ |
488 | |
489 | void emitter::emitInit() |
490 | { |
491 | } |
492 | |
493 | /***************************************************************************** |
494 | * |
495 | * Shut down the emitter - called once, at DLL exit time. |
496 | */ |
497 | |
498 | void emitter::emitDone() |
499 | { |
500 | } |
501 | |
502 | /***************************************************************************** |
503 | * |
504 | * Allocate memory. |
505 | */ |
506 | |
507 | void* emitter::emitGetMem(size_t sz) |
508 | { |
509 | assert(sz % sizeof(int) == 0); |
510 | |
511 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
512 | emitTotMemAlloc += sz; |
513 | #endif |
514 | |
515 | return emitComp->getAllocator(CMK_InstDesc).allocate<char>(sz); |
516 | } |
517 | |
518 | /***************************************************************************** |
519 | * |
520 | * emitLclVarAddr support methods |
521 | */ |
522 | void emitLclVarAddr::initLclVarAddr(int varNum, unsigned offset) |
523 | { |
524 | if (varNum < 32768) |
525 | { |
526 | if (varNum >= 0) |
527 | { |
528 | if (offset < 32768) |
529 | { |
530 | _lvaTag = LVA_STANDARD_ENCODING; |
531 | _lvaExtra = offset; // offset known to be in [0..32767] |
532 | _lvaVarNum = (unsigned)varNum; // varNum known to be in [0..32767] |
533 | } |
534 | else // offset >= 32768 |
535 | { |
536 | // We could support larger local offsets here at the cost of less varNums |
537 | if (offset >= 65536) |
538 | { |
539 | IMPL_LIMITATION("JIT doesn't support offsets larger than 65535 into valuetypes\n" ); |
540 | } |
541 | |
542 | _lvaTag = LVA_LARGE_OFFSET; |
543 | _lvaExtra = (offset - 32768); // (offset-32768) is known to be in [0..32767] |
544 | _lvaVarNum = (unsigned)varNum; // varNum known to be in [0..32767] |
545 | } |
546 | } |
547 | else // varNum < 0, These are used for Compiler spill temps |
548 | { |
549 | if (varNum < -32767) |
550 | { |
551 | IMPL_LIMITATION("JIT doesn't support more than 32767 Compiler Spill temps\n" ); |
552 | } |
553 | if (offset > 32767) |
554 | { |
555 | IMPL_LIMITATION( |
556 | "JIT doesn't support offsets larger than 32767 into valuetypes for Compiler Spill temps\n" ); |
557 | } |
558 | |
559 | _lvaTag = LVA_COMPILER_TEMP; |
560 | _lvaExtra = offset; // offset known to be in [0..32767] |
561 | _lvaVarNum = (unsigned)(-varNum); // -varNum known to be in [1..32767] |
562 | } |
563 | } |
564 | else // varNum >= 32768 |
565 | { |
566 | if (offset >= 256) |
567 | { |
568 | IMPL_LIMITATION("JIT doesn't support offsets larger than 255 into valuetypes for local vars > 32767\n" ); |
569 | } |
570 | if (varNum >= 0x00400000) |
571 | { // 0x00400000 == 2^22 |
572 | IMPL_LIMITATION("JIT doesn't support more than 2^22 variables\n" ); |
573 | } |
574 | |
575 | _lvaTag = LVA_LARGE_VARNUM; |
576 | _lvaVarNum = varNum & 0x00007FFF; // varNum bits 14 to 0 |
577 | _lvaExtra = (varNum & 0x003F8000) >> 15; // varNum bits 21 to 15 in _lvaExtra bits 6 to 0, 7 bits total |
578 | _lvaExtra |= (offset << 7); // offset bits 7 to 0 in _lvaExtra bits 14 to 7, 8 bits total |
579 | } |
580 | } |
581 | |
582 | // Returns the variable to access. Note that it returns a negative number for compiler spill temps. |
583 | int emitLclVarAddr::lvaVarNum() |
584 | { |
585 | switch (_lvaTag) |
586 | { |
587 | case LVA_COMPILER_TEMP: |
588 | return -((int)_lvaVarNum); |
589 | case LVA_LARGE_VARNUM: |
590 | return (int)(((_lvaExtra & 0x007F) << 15) + _lvaVarNum); |
591 | default: // LVA_STANDARD_ENCODING or LVA_LARGE_OFFSET |
592 | assert((_lvaTag == LVA_STANDARD_ENCODING) || (_lvaTag == LVA_LARGE_OFFSET)); |
593 | return (int)_lvaVarNum; |
594 | } |
595 | } |
596 | |
597 | unsigned emitLclVarAddr::lvaOffset() // returns the offset into the variable to access |
598 | { |
599 | switch (_lvaTag) |
600 | { |
601 | case LVA_LARGE_OFFSET: |
602 | return (32768 + _lvaExtra); |
603 | case LVA_LARGE_VARNUM: |
604 | return (_lvaExtra & 0x7F80) >> 7; |
605 | default: // LVA_STANDARD_ENCODING or LVA_COMPILER_TEMP |
606 | assert((_lvaTag == LVA_STANDARD_ENCODING) || (_lvaTag == LVA_COMPILER_TEMP)); |
607 | return _lvaExtra; |
608 | } |
609 | } |
610 | |
611 | /***************************************************************************** |
612 | * |
613 | * Record some info about the method about to be emitted. |
614 | */ |
615 | |
616 | void emitter::emitBegCG(Compiler* comp, COMP_HANDLE cmpHandle) |
617 | { |
618 | emitComp = comp; |
619 | emitCmpHandle = cmpHandle; |
620 | } |
621 | |
622 | void emitter::emitEndCG() |
623 | { |
624 | } |
625 | |
626 | /***************************************************************************** |
627 | * |
628 | * Prepare the given IG for emission of code. |
629 | */ |
630 | |
631 | void emitter::emitGenIG(insGroup* ig) |
632 | { |
633 | /* Set the "current IG" value */ |
634 | |
635 | emitCurIG = ig; |
636 | |
637 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
638 | |
639 | /* Record the stack level on entry to this group */ |
640 | |
641 | ig->igStkLvl = emitCurStackLvl; |
642 | |
643 | // If we don't have enough bits in igStkLvl, refuse to compile |
644 | |
645 | if (ig->igStkLvl != emitCurStackLvl) |
646 | { |
647 | IMPL_LIMITATION("Too many arguments pushed on stack" ); |
648 | } |
649 | |
650 | // printf("Start IG #%02u [stk=%02u]\n", ig->igNum, emitCurStackLvl); |
651 | |
652 | #endif |
653 | |
654 | if (emitNoGCIG) |
655 | { |
656 | ig->igFlags |= IGF_NOGCINTERRUPT; |
657 | } |
658 | |
659 | /* Prepare to issue instructions */ |
660 | |
661 | emitCurIGinsCnt = 0; |
662 | emitCurIGsize = 0; |
663 | |
664 | assert(emitCurIGjmpList == nullptr); |
665 | |
666 | /* Allocate the temp instruction buffer if we haven't done so */ |
667 | |
668 | if (emitCurIGfreeBase == nullptr) |
669 | { |
670 | emitIGbuffSize = SC_IG_BUFFER_SIZE; |
671 | emitCurIGfreeBase = (BYTE*)emitGetMem(emitIGbuffSize); |
672 | } |
673 | |
674 | emitCurIGfreeNext = emitCurIGfreeBase; |
675 | emitCurIGfreeEndp = emitCurIGfreeBase + emitIGbuffSize; |
676 | } |
677 | |
678 | /***************************************************************************** |
679 | * |
680 | * Finish and save the current IG. |
681 | */ |
682 | |
683 | insGroup* emitter::emitSavIG(bool emitAdd) |
684 | { |
685 | insGroup* ig; |
686 | BYTE* id; |
687 | |
688 | size_t sz; |
689 | size_t gs; |
690 | |
691 | assert(emitCurIGfreeNext <= emitCurIGfreeEndp); |
692 | |
693 | /* Get hold of the IG descriptor */ |
694 | |
695 | ig = emitCurIG; |
696 | assert(ig); |
697 | |
698 | /* Compute how much code we've generated */ |
699 | |
700 | sz = emitCurIGfreeNext - emitCurIGfreeBase; |
701 | |
702 | /* Compute the total size we need to allocate */ |
703 | |
704 | gs = roundUp(sz); |
705 | |
706 | /* Do we need space for GC? */ |
707 | |
708 | if (!(ig->igFlags & IGF_EMIT_ADD)) |
709 | { |
710 | /* Is the initial set of live GC vars different from the previous one? */ |
711 | |
712 | if (emitForceStoreGCState || !VarSetOps::Equal(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars, emitInitGCrefVars)) |
713 | { |
714 | /* Remember that we will have a new set of live GC variables */ |
715 | |
716 | ig->igFlags |= IGF_GC_VARS; |
717 | |
718 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
719 | emitTotalIGptrs++; |
720 | #endif |
721 | |
722 | /* We'll allocate extra space to record the liveset */ |
723 | |
724 | gs += sizeof(VARSET_TP); |
725 | } |
726 | |
727 | /* Is the initial set of live Byref regs different from the previous one? */ |
728 | |
729 | /* Remember that we will have a new set of live GC variables */ |
730 | |
731 | ig->igFlags |= IGF_BYREF_REGS; |
732 | |
733 | /* We'll allocate extra space (DWORD aligned) to record the GC regs */ |
734 | |
735 | gs += sizeof(int); |
736 | } |
737 | |
738 | /* Allocate space for the instructions and optional liveset */ |
739 | |
740 | id = (BYTE*)emitGetMem(gs); |
741 | |
742 | /* Do we need to store the byref regs */ |
743 | |
744 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_BYREF_REGS) |
745 | { |
746 | /* Record the byref regs in front the of the instructions */ |
747 | |
748 | *castto(id, unsigned*)++ = (unsigned)emitInitByrefRegs; |
749 | } |
750 | |
751 | /* Do we need to store the liveset? */ |
752 | |
753 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_GC_VARS) |
754 | { |
755 | /* Record the liveset in front the of the instructions */ |
756 | VarSetOps::AssignNoCopy(emitComp, (*castto(id, VARSET_TP*)), VarSetOps::MakeEmpty(emitComp)); |
757 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, (*castto(id, VARSET_TP*)++), emitInitGCrefVars); |
758 | } |
759 | |
760 | /* Record the collected instructions */ |
761 | |
762 | assert((ig->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER) == 0); |
763 | ig->igData = id; |
764 | |
765 | memcpy(id, emitCurIGfreeBase, sz); |
766 | |
767 | #ifdef DEBUG |
768 | if (false && emitComp->verbose) // this is not useful in normal dumps (hence it is normally under if (false) |
769 | { |
770 | // If there's an error during emission, we may want to connect the post-copy address |
771 | // of an instrDesc with the pre-copy address (the one that was originally created). This |
772 | // printing enables that. |
773 | printf("copying instruction group from [0x%x..0x%x) to [0x%x..0x%x).\n" , dspPtr(emitCurIGfreeBase), |
774 | dspPtr(emitCurIGfreeBase + sz), dspPtr(id), dspPtr(id + sz)); |
775 | } |
776 | #endif |
777 | |
778 | /* Record how many instructions and bytes of code this group contains */ |
779 | |
780 | noway_assert((BYTE)emitCurIGinsCnt == emitCurIGinsCnt); |
781 | noway_assert((unsigned short)emitCurIGsize == emitCurIGsize); |
782 | |
783 | ig->igInsCnt = (BYTE)emitCurIGinsCnt; |
784 | ig->igSize = (unsigned short)emitCurIGsize; |
785 | emitCurCodeOffset += emitCurIGsize; |
786 | assert(IsCodeAligned(emitCurCodeOffset)); |
787 | |
788 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
789 | emitTotalIGicnt += emitCurIGinsCnt; |
790 | emitTotalIGsize += sz; |
791 | emitSizeMethod += sz; |
792 | #endif |
793 | |
794 | // printf("Group [%08X]%3u has %2u instructions (%4u bytes at %08X)\n", ig, ig->igNum, emitCurIGinsCnt, sz, id); |
795 | |
796 | /* Record the live GC register set - if and only if it is not an emitter added block */ |
797 | |
798 | if (!(ig->igFlags & IGF_EMIT_ADD)) |
799 | { |
800 | ig->igGCregs = (regMaskSmall)emitInitGCrefRegs; |
801 | } |
802 | |
803 | if (!emitAdd) |
804 | { |
805 | /* Update the previous recorded live GC ref sets, but not if |
806 | if we are starting an "overflow" buffer. Note that this is |
807 | only used to determine whether we need to store or not store |
808 | the GC ref sets for the next IG, which is dependent on exactly |
809 | what the state of the emitter GC ref sets will be when the |
810 | next IG is processed in the emitter. |
811 | */ |
812 | |
813 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars, emitThisGCrefVars); |
814 | emitPrevGCrefRegs = emitThisGCrefRegs; |
815 | emitPrevByrefRegs = emitThisByrefRegs; |
816 | |
817 | emitForceStoreGCState = false; |
818 | } |
819 | |
820 | #ifdef DEBUG |
821 | if (emitComp->opts.dspCode) |
822 | { |
823 | printf("\n G_M%03u_IG%02u:" , Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, ig->igNum); |
824 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
825 | { |
826 | printf(" ; offs=%06XH, funclet=%02u" , ig->igOffs, ig->igFuncIdx); |
827 | } |
828 | else |
829 | { |
830 | printf(" ; funclet=%02u" , ig->igFuncIdx); |
831 | } |
832 | printf("\n" ); |
833 | } |
834 | #endif |
835 | |
836 | /* Did we have any jumps in this group? */ |
837 | |
838 | if (emitCurIGjmpList) |
839 | { |
840 | instrDescJmp* list = nullptr; |
841 | instrDescJmp* last = nullptr; |
842 | |
843 | /* Move jumps to the global list, update their 'next' links */ |
844 | |
845 | do |
846 | { |
847 | /* Grab the jump and remove it from the list */ |
848 | |
849 | instrDescJmp* oj = emitCurIGjmpList; |
850 | emitCurIGjmpList = oj->idjNext; |
851 | |
852 | /* Figure out the address of where the jump got copied */ |
853 | |
854 | size_t of = (BYTE*)oj - emitCurIGfreeBase; |
855 | instrDescJmp* nj = (instrDescJmp*)(ig->igData + of); |
856 | |
857 | // printf("Jump moved from %08X to %08X\n", oj, nj); |
858 | // printf("jmp [%08X] at %08X + %03u\n", nj, ig, nj->idjOffs); |
859 | |
860 | assert(nj->idjIG == ig); |
861 | assert(nj->idIns() == oj->idIns()); |
862 | assert(nj->idjNext == oj->idjNext); |
863 | |
864 | /* Make sure the jumps are correctly ordered */ |
865 | |
866 | assert(last == nullptr || last->idjOffs > nj->idjOffs); |
867 | |
868 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG) |
869 | { |
870 | // Our funclet prologs have short jumps, if the prolog would ever have |
871 | // long jumps, then we'd have to insert the list in sorted order than |
872 | // just append to the emitJumpList. |
873 | noway_assert(nj->idjShort); |
874 | if (nj->idjShort) |
875 | { |
876 | continue; |
877 | } |
878 | } |
879 | |
880 | /* Append the new jump to the list */ |
881 | |
882 | nj->idjNext = list; |
883 | list = nj; |
884 | |
885 | if (last == nullptr) |
886 | { |
887 | last = nj; |
888 | } |
889 | } while (emitCurIGjmpList); |
890 | |
891 | if (last != nullptr) |
892 | { |
893 | /* Append the jump(s) from this IG to the global list */ |
894 | bool prologJump = (ig == emitPrologIG); |
895 | if ((emitJumpList == nullptr) || prologJump) |
896 | { |
897 | last->idjNext = emitJumpList; |
898 | emitJumpList = list; |
899 | } |
900 | else |
901 | { |
902 | last->idjNext = nullptr; |
903 | emitJumpLast->idjNext = list; |
904 | } |
905 | |
906 | if (!prologJump || (emitJumpLast == nullptr)) |
907 | { |
908 | emitJumpLast = last; |
909 | } |
910 | } |
911 | } |
912 | |
913 | /* Fix the last instruction field */ |
914 | |
915 | if (sz != 0) |
916 | { |
917 | assert(emitLastIns != nullptr); |
918 | assert(emitCurIGfreeBase <= (BYTE*)emitLastIns); |
919 | assert((BYTE*)emitLastIns < emitCurIGfreeBase + sz); |
920 | emitLastIns = (instrDesc*)((BYTE*)id + ((BYTE*)emitLastIns - (BYTE*)emitCurIGfreeBase)); |
921 | } |
922 | |
923 | /* Reset the buffer free pointers */ |
924 | |
925 | emitCurIGfreeNext = emitCurIGfreeBase; |
926 | |
927 | return ig; |
928 | } |
929 | |
930 | /***************************************************************************** |
931 | * |
932 | * Start generating code to be scheduled; called once per method. |
933 | */ |
934 | |
935 | void emitter::emitBegFN(bool hasFramePtr |
936 | #if defined(DEBUG) |
937 | , |
938 | bool chkAlign |
939 | #endif |
940 | , |
941 | unsigned maxTmpSize) |
942 | { |
943 | insGroup* ig; |
944 | |
945 | /* Assume we won't need the temp instruction buffer */ |
946 | |
947 | emitCurIGfreeBase = nullptr; |
948 | emitIGbuffSize = 0; |
949 | |
950 | /* Record stack frame info (the temp size is just an estimate) */ |
951 | |
952 | emitHasFramePtr = hasFramePtr; |
953 | |
954 | emitMaxTmpSize = maxTmpSize; |
955 | |
956 | #ifdef DEBUG |
957 | emitChkAlign = chkAlign; |
958 | #endif |
959 | |
960 | /* We have no epilogs yet */ |
961 | |
962 | emitEpilogSize = 0; |
963 | emitEpilogCnt = 0; |
964 | |
965 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
966 | emitExitSeqBegLoc.Init(); |
967 | emitExitSeqSize = INT_MAX; |
968 | #endif // _TARGET_XARCH_ |
969 | |
970 | emitPlaceholderList = emitPlaceholderLast = nullptr; |
971 | |
972 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
973 | emitEpilogList = emitEpilogLast = nullptr; |
974 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
975 | |
976 | /* We don't have any jumps */ |
977 | |
978 | emitJumpList = emitJumpLast = nullptr; |
979 | emitCurIGjmpList = nullptr; |
980 | |
981 | emitFwdJumps = false; |
982 | emitNoGCIG = false; |
983 | emitForceNewIG = false; |
984 | |
985 | /* We have not recorded any live sets */ |
986 | |
987 | assert(VarSetOps::IsEmpty(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars)); |
988 | assert(VarSetOps::IsEmpty(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars)); |
989 | assert(VarSetOps::IsEmpty(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars)); |
990 | emitThisGCrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
991 | emitInitGCrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
992 | emitPrevGCrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
993 | emitThisByrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
994 | emitInitByrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
995 | emitPrevByrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
996 | |
997 | emitForceStoreGCState = false; |
998 | |
999 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1000 | |
1001 | emitIssuing = false; |
1002 | |
1003 | #endif |
1004 | |
1005 | /* Assume there will be no GC ref variables */ |
1006 | |
1007 | emitGCrFrameOffsMin = emitGCrFrameOffsMax = emitGCrFrameOffsCnt = 0; |
1008 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1009 | emitGCrFrameLiveTab = nullptr; |
1010 | #endif |
1011 | |
1012 | /* We have no groups / code at this point */ |
1013 | |
1014 | emitIGlist = emitIGlast = nullptr; |
1015 | |
1016 | emitCurCodeOffset = 0; |
1017 | emitFirstColdIG = nullptr; |
1018 | emitTotalCodeSize = 0; |
1019 | |
1020 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
1021 | emitTotalIGmcnt++; |
1022 | emitSizeMethod = 0; |
1023 | #endif |
1024 | |
1025 | emitInsCount = 0; |
1026 | |
1027 | /* The stack is empty now */ |
1028 | |
1029 | emitCurStackLvl = 0; |
1030 | |
1031 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
1032 | emitMaxStackDepth = 0; |
1033 | emitCntStackDepth = sizeof(int); |
1034 | #endif |
1035 | |
1036 | /* No data sections have been created */ |
1037 | |
1038 | emitDataSecCur = nullptr; |
1039 | |
1040 | memset(&emitConsDsc, 0, sizeof(emitConsDsc)); |
1041 | |
1042 | #ifdef PSEUDORANDOM_NOP_INSERTION |
1043 | // for random NOP insertion |
1044 | |
1045 | emitEnableRandomNops(); |
1046 | emitComp->info.compRNG.Init(emitComp->info.compChecksum); |
1047 | emitNextNop = emitNextRandomNop(); |
1048 | emitInInstrumentation = false; |
1049 | #endif // PSEUDORANDOM_NOP_INSERTION |
1050 | |
1051 | /* Create the first IG, it will be used for the prolog */ |
1052 | |
1053 | emitNxtIGnum = 1; |
1054 | |
1055 | emitPrologIG = emitIGlist = emitIGlast = emitCurIG = ig = emitAllocIG(); |
1056 | |
1057 | emitLastIns = nullptr; |
1058 | |
1059 | ig->igNext = nullptr; |
1060 | |
1061 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1062 | emitScratchSigInfo = nullptr; |
1063 | #endif // DEBUG |
1064 | |
1065 | /* Append another group, to start generating the method body */ |
1066 | |
1067 | emitNewIG(); |
1068 | } |
1069 | |
1070 | #ifdef PSEUDORANDOM_NOP_INSERTION |
1071 | int emitter::emitNextRandomNop() |
1072 | { |
1073 | return emitComp->info.compRNG.Next(1, 9); |
1074 | } |
1075 | #endif |
1076 | |
1077 | /***************************************************************************** |
1078 | * |
1079 | * Done generating code to be scheduled; called once per method. |
1080 | */ |
1081 | |
1082 | void emitter::emitEndFN() |
1083 | { |
1084 | } |
1085 | |
1086 | // member function iiaIsJitDataOffset for idAddrUnion, defers to Compiler::eeIsJitDataOffs |
1087 | bool emitter::instrDesc::idAddrUnion::iiaIsJitDataOffset() const |
1088 | { |
1089 | return Compiler::eeIsJitDataOffs(iiaFieldHnd); |
1090 | } |
1091 | |
1092 | // member function iiaGetJitDataOffset for idAddrUnion, defers to Compiler::eeGetJitDataOffs |
1093 | int emitter::instrDesc::idAddrUnion::iiaGetJitDataOffset() const |
1094 | { |
1095 | assert(iiaIsJitDataOffset()); |
1096 | return Compiler::eeGetJitDataOffs(iiaFieldHnd); |
1097 | } |
1098 | |
1099 | void emitter::dispIns(instrDesc* id) |
1100 | { |
1101 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1102 | emitInsSanityCheck(id); |
1103 | |
1104 | if (emitComp->opts.dspCode) |
1105 | { |
1106 | emitDispIns(id, true, false, false); |
1107 | } |
1108 | |
1109 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
1110 | assert((int)emitCurStackLvl >= 0); |
1111 | #endif |
1112 | size_t sz = emitSizeOfInsDsc(id); |
1113 | assert(id->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idSize == sz); |
1114 | #endif // DEBUG |
1115 | |
1116 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
1117 | emitIFcounts[id->idInsFmt()]++; |
1118 | #endif |
1119 | } |
1120 | |
1121 | void emitter::appendToCurIG(instrDesc* id) |
1122 | { |
1123 | emitCurIGsize += id->idCodeSize(); |
1124 | } |
1125 | |
1126 | /***************************************************************************** |
1127 | * |
1128 | * Display (optionally) an instruction offset. |
1129 | */ |
1130 | |
1131 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1132 | |
1133 | void emitter::emitDispInsOffs(unsigned offs, bool doffs) |
1134 | { |
1135 | if (doffs) |
1136 | { |
1137 | printf("%06X" , offs); |
1138 | } |
1139 | else |
1140 | { |
1141 | printf(" " ); |
1142 | } |
1143 | } |
1144 | |
1145 | #endif // DEBUG |
1146 | |
1147 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
1148 | |
1149 | /***************************************************************************** |
1150 | * |
1151 | * Call the specified function pointer for each epilog block in the current |
1152 | * method with the epilog's relative code offset. Returns the sum of the |
1153 | * values returned by the callback. |
1154 | */ |
1155 | |
1156 | size_t emitter::emitGenEpilogLst(size_t (*fp)(void*, unsigned), void* cp) |
1157 | { |
1158 | EpilogList* el; |
1159 | size_t sz; |
1160 | |
1161 | for (el = emitEpilogList, sz = 0; el != nullptr; el = el->elNext) |
1162 | { |
1163 | assert(el->elLoc.GetIG()->igFlags & IGF_EPILOG); |
1164 | |
1165 | // The epilog starts at the location recorded in the epilog list. |
1166 | sz += fp(cp, el->elLoc.CodeOffset(this)); |
1167 | } |
1168 | |
1169 | return sz; |
1170 | } |
1171 | |
1172 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
1173 | |
1174 | /***************************************************************************** |
1175 | * |
1176 | * The following series of methods allocates instruction descriptors. |
1177 | */ |
1178 | |
1179 | void* emitter::emitAllocInstr(size_t sz, emitAttr opsz) |
1180 | { |
1181 | instrDesc* id; |
1182 | |
1183 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1184 | // Under STRESS_EMITTER, put every instruction in its own instruction group. |
1185 | // We can't do this for a prolog, epilog, funclet prolog, or funclet epilog, |
1186 | // because those are generated out of order. We currently have a limitation |
1187 | // where the jump shortening pass uses the instruction group number to determine |
1188 | // if something is earlier or later in the code stream. This implies that |
1189 | // these groups cannot be more than a single instruction group. Note that |
1190 | // the prolog/epilog placeholder groups ARE generated in order, and are |
1191 | // re-used. But generating additional groups would not work. |
1192 | if (emitComp->compStressCompile(Compiler::STRESS_EMITTER, 1) && emitCurIGinsCnt && !emitIGisInProlog(emitCurIG) && |
1193 | !emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG) |
1194 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1195 | && !emitIGisInFuncletProlog(emitCurIG) && !emitIGisInFuncletEpilog(emitCurIG) |
1196 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1197 | ) |
1198 | { |
1199 | emitNxtIG(true); |
1200 | } |
1201 | #endif |
1202 | |
1203 | #ifdef PSEUDORANDOM_NOP_INSERTION |
1204 | // TODO-ARM-Bug?: PSEUDORANDOM_NOP_INSERTION is not defined for _TARGET_ARM_ |
1205 | // ARM - This is currently broken on _TARGET_ARM_ |
1206 | // When nopSize is odd we misalign emitCurIGsize |
1207 | // |
1208 | if (!emitComp->opts.jitFlags->IsSet(JitFlags::JIT_FLAG_PREJIT) && !emitInInstrumentation && |
1209 | !emitIGisInProlog(emitCurIG) && // don't do this in prolog or epilog |
1210 | !emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG) && |
1211 | emitRandomNops // sometimes we turn off where exact codegen is needed (pinvoke inline) |
1212 | ) |
1213 | { |
1214 | if (emitNextNop == 0) |
1215 | { |
1216 | int nopSize = 4; |
1217 | emitInInstrumentation = true; |
1218 | instrDesc* idnop = emitNewInstr(); |
1219 | emitInInstrumentation = false; |
1220 | idnop->idInsFmt(IF_NONE); |
1221 | idnop->idIns(INS_nop); |
1222 | #if defined(_TARGET_XARCH_) |
1223 | idnop->idCodeSize(nopSize); |
1224 | #else |
1225 | #error "Undefined target for pseudorandom NOP insertion" |
1226 | #endif |
1227 | |
1228 | emitCurIGsize += nopSize; |
1229 | emitNextNop = emitNextRandomNop(); |
1230 | } |
1231 | else |
1232 | emitNextNop--; |
1233 | } |
1234 | #endif // PSEUDORANDOM_NOP_INSERTION |
1235 | |
1236 | assert(IsCodeAligned(emitCurIGsize)); |
1237 | |
1238 | /* Make sure we have enough space for the new instruction */ |
1239 | |
1240 | if ((emitCurIGfreeNext + sz >= emitCurIGfreeEndp) || emitForceNewIG) |
1241 | { |
1242 | emitNxtIG(true); |
1243 | } |
1244 | |
1245 | /* Grab the space for the instruction */ |
1246 | |
1247 | emitLastIns = id = (instrDesc*)emitCurIGfreeNext; |
1248 | emitCurIGfreeNext += sz; |
1249 | |
1250 | assert(sz >= sizeof(void*)); |
1251 | memset(id, 0, sz); |
1252 | |
1253 | // These fields should have been zero-ed by the above |
1254 | assert(id->idReg1() == regNumber(0)); |
1255 | assert(id->idReg2() == regNumber(0)); |
1256 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
1257 | assert(id->idCodeSize() == 0); |
1258 | #endif |
1259 | |
1260 | // Make sure that idAddrUnion is just a union of various pointer sized things |
1261 | C_ASSERT(sizeof(CORINFO_FIELD_HANDLE) <= sizeof(void*)); |
1262 | C_ASSERT(sizeof(CORINFO_METHOD_HANDLE) <= sizeof(void*)); |
1263 | C_ASSERT(sizeof(emitter::emitAddrMode) <= sizeof(void*)); |
1264 | C_ASSERT(sizeof(emitLclVarAddr) <= sizeof(void*)); |
1265 | C_ASSERT(sizeof(emitter::instrDesc) == (SMALL_IDSC_SIZE + sizeof(void*))); |
1266 | |
1267 | emitInsCount++; |
1268 | |
1269 | #if defined(DEBUG) |
1270 | /* In debug mode we clear/set some additional fields */ |
1271 | |
1272 | instrDescDebugInfo* info = (instrDescDebugInfo*)emitGetMem(sizeof(*info)); |
1273 | |
1274 | info->idNum = emitInsCount; |
1275 | info->idSize = sz; |
1276 | info->idVarRefOffs = 0; |
1277 | info->idMemCookie = 0; |
1278 | #ifdef TRANSLATE_PDB |
1279 | info->idilStart = emitInstrDescILBase; |
1280 | #endif |
1281 | info->idFinallyCall = false; |
1282 | info->idCatchRet = false; |
1283 | info->idCallSig = nullptr; |
1284 | |
1285 | id->idDebugOnlyInfo(info); |
1286 | |
1287 | #endif // defined(DEBUG) |
1288 | |
1289 | /* Store the size and handle the two special values |
1290 | that indicate GCref and ByRef */ |
1291 | |
1292 | if (EA_IS_GCREF(opsz)) |
1293 | { |
1294 | /* A special value indicates a GCref pointer value */ |
1295 | |
1296 | id->idGCref(GCT_GCREF); |
1297 | id->idOpSize(EA_PTRSIZE); |
1298 | } |
1299 | else if (EA_IS_BYREF(opsz)) |
1300 | { |
1301 | /* A special value indicates a Byref pointer value */ |
1302 | |
1303 | id->idGCref(GCT_BYREF); |
1304 | id->idOpSize(EA_PTRSIZE); |
1305 | } |
1306 | else |
1307 | { |
1308 | id->idGCref(GCT_NONE); |
1309 | id->idOpSize(EA_SIZE(opsz)); |
1310 | } |
1311 | |
1312 | // Amd64: ip-relative addressing is supported even when not generating relocatable ngen code |
1313 | if (EA_IS_DSP_RELOC(opsz) |
1314 | #ifndef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
1315 | && emitComp->opts.compReloc |
1316 | #endif //_TARGET_AMD64_ |
1317 | ) |
1318 | { |
1319 | /* Mark idInfo()->idDspReloc to remember that the */ |
1320 | /* address mode has a displacement that is relocatable */ |
1321 | id->idSetIsDspReloc(); |
1322 | } |
1323 | |
1324 | if (EA_IS_CNS_RELOC(opsz) && emitComp->opts.compReloc) |
1325 | { |
1326 | /* Mark idInfo()->idCnsReloc to remember that the */ |
1327 | /* instruction has an immediate constant that is relocatable */ |
1328 | id->idSetIsCnsReloc(); |
1329 | } |
1330 | |
1331 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
1332 | emitTotalInsCnt++; |
1333 | #endif |
1334 | |
1335 | /* Update the instruction count */ |
1336 | |
1337 | emitCurIGinsCnt++; |
1338 | |
1339 | return id; |
1340 | } |
1341 | |
1342 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1343 | |
1344 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
1345 | // emitCheckIGoffsets: Make sure the code offsets of all instruction groups look reasonable. |
1346 | // |
1347 | // Note: It checks that each instruction group starts right after the previous ig. |
1348 | // For the first cold ig offset is also should be the last hot ig + its size. |
1349 | // emitCurCodeOffs maintains distance for the split case to look like they are consistent. |
1350 | // Also it checks total code size. |
1351 | // |
1352 | void emitter::emitCheckIGoffsets() |
1353 | { |
1354 | size_t currentOffset = 0; |
1355 | |
1356 | for (insGroup* tempIG = emitIGlist; tempIG != nullptr; tempIG = tempIG->igNext) |
1357 | { |
1358 | if (tempIG->igOffs != currentOffset) |
1359 | { |
1360 | printf("Block #%u has offset %08X, expected %08X\n" , tempIG->igNum, tempIG->igOffs, currentOffset); |
1361 | assert(!"bad block offset" ); |
1362 | } |
1363 | |
1364 | currentOffset += tempIG->igSize; |
1365 | } |
1366 | |
1367 | if (emitTotalCodeSize != 0 && emitTotalCodeSize != currentOffset) |
1368 | { |
1369 | printf("Total code size is %08X, expected %08X\n" , emitTotalCodeSize, currentOffset); |
1370 | |
1371 | assert(!"bad total code size" ); |
1372 | } |
1373 | } |
1374 | |
1375 | #endif // DEBUG |
1376 | |
1377 | /***************************************************************************** |
1378 | * |
1379 | * Begin generating a method prolog. |
1380 | */ |
1381 | |
1382 | void emitter::emitBegProlog() |
1383 | { |
1384 | assert(emitComp->compGeneratingProlog); |
1385 | |
1386 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
1387 | |
1388 | /* Don't measure stack depth inside the prolog, it's misleading */ |
1389 | |
1390 | emitCntStackDepth = 0; |
1391 | |
1392 | assert(emitCurStackLvl == 0); |
1393 | |
1394 | #endif |
1395 | |
1396 | emitNoGCIG = true; |
1397 | emitForceNewIG = false; |
1398 | |
1399 | /* Switch to the pre-allocated prolog IG */ |
1400 | |
1401 | emitGenIG(emitPrologIG); |
1402 | |
1403 | /* Nothing is live on entry to the prolog */ |
1404 | |
1405 | // These were initialized to Empty at the start of compilation. |
1406 | VarSetOps::ClearD(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars); |
1407 | VarSetOps::ClearD(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars); |
1408 | emitInitGCrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
1409 | emitPrevGCrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
1410 | emitInitByrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
1411 | emitPrevByrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
1412 | } |
1413 | |
1414 | /***************************************************************************** |
1415 | * |
1416 | * Return the code offset of the current location in the prolog. |
1417 | */ |
1418 | |
1419 | unsigned emitter::emitGetPrologOffsetEstimate() |
1420 | { |
1421 | /* For now only allow a single prolog ins group */ |
1422 | |
1423 | assert(emitPrologIG); |
1424 | assert(emitPrologIG == emitCurIG); |
1425 | |
1426 | return emitCurIGsize; |
1427 | } |
1428 | |
1429 | /***************************************************************************** |
1430 | * |
1431 | * Mark the code offset of the current location as the end of the prolog, |
1432 | * so it can be used later to compute the actual size of the prolog. |
1433 | */ |
1434 | |
1435 | void emitter::emitMarkPrologEnd() |
1436 | { |
1437 | assert(emitComp->compGeneratingProlog); |
1438 | |
1439 | /* For now only allow a single prolog ins group */ |
1440 | |
1441 | assert(emitPrologIG); |
1442 | assert(emitPrologIG == emitCurIG); |
1443 | |
1444 | emitPrologEndPos = emitCurOffset(); |
1445 | } |
1446 | |
1447 | /***************************************************************************** |
1448 | * |
1449 | * Finish generating a method prolog. |
1450 | */ |
1451 | |
1452 | void emitter::emitEndProlog() |
1453 | { |
1454 | assert(emitComp->compGeneratingProlog); |
1455 | |
1456 | emitNoGCIG = false; |
1457 | |
1458 | /* Save the prolog IG if non-empty or if only one block */ |
1459 | |
1460 | if (emitCurIGnonEmpty() || emitCurIG == emitPrologIG) |
1461 | { |
1462 | emitSavIG(); |
1463 | } |
1464 | |
1465 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
1466 | /* Reset the stack depth values */ |
1467 | |
1468 | emitCurStackLvl = 0; |
1469 | emitCntStackDepth = sizeof(int); |
1470 | #endif |
1471 | } |
1472 | |
1473 | /***************************************************************************** |
1474 | * |
1475 | * Create a placeholder instruction group to be used by a prolog or epilog, |
1476 | * either for the main function, or a funclet. |
1477 | */ |
1478 | |
1479 | void emitter::emitCreatePlaceholderIG(insGroupPlaceholderType igType, |
1480 | BasicBlock* igBB, |
1481 | VARSET_VALARG_TP GCvars, |
1482 | regMaskTP gcrefRegs, |
1483 | regMaskTP byrefRegs, |
1484 | bool last) |
1485 | { |
1486 | assert(igBB != nullptr); |
1487 | |
1488 | bool emitAdd = false; |
1489 | |
1490 | if (igType == IGPT_EPILOG |
1491 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1492 | || igType == IGPT_FUNCLET_EPILOG |
1493 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1494 | ) |
1495 | { |
1496 | #ifdef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
1497 | emitOutputPreEpilogNOP(); |
1498 | #endif // _TARGET_AMD64_ |
1499 | |
1500 | emitAdd = true; |
1501 | } |
1502 | |
1503 | if (emitCurIGnonEmpty()) |
1504 | { |
1505 | emitNxtIG(emitAdd); |
1506 | } |
1507 | |
1508 | /* Update GC tracking for the beginning of the placeholder IG */ |
1509 | |
1510 | if (!emitAdd) |
1511 | { |
1512 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars, GCvars); |
1513 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars, GCvars); |
1514 | emitThisGCrefRegs = emitInitGCrefRegs = gcrefRegs; |
1515 | emitThisByrefRegs = emitInitByrefRegs = byrefRegs; |
1516 | } |
1517 | |
1518 | /* Convert the group to a placeholder group */ |
1519 | |
1520 | insGroup* igPh = emitCurIG; |
1521 | |
1522 | igPh->igFlags |= IGF_PLACEHOLDER; |
1523 | |
1524 | /* Note that we might be re-using a previously created but empty IG. In this |
1525 | * case, we need to make sure any re-used fields, such as igFuncIdx, are correct. |
1526 | */ |
1527 | |
1528 | igPh->igFuncIdx = emitComp->compCurrFuncIdx; |
1529 | |
1530 | /* Create a separate block of memory to store placeholder information. |
1531 | * We could use unions to put some of this into the insGroup itself, but we don't |
1532 | * want to grow the insGroup, and it's difficult to make sure the |
1533 | * insGroup fields are getting set and used elsewhere. |
1534 | */ |
1535 | |
1536 | igPh->igPhData = new (emitComp, CMK_InstDesc) insPlaceholderGroupData; |
1537 | |
1538 | igPh->igPhData->igPhNext = nullptr; |
1539 | igPh->igPhData->igPhType = igType; |
1540 | igPh->igPhData->igPhBB = igBB; |
1541 | |
1542 | VarSetOps::AssignNoCopy(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefVars, VarSetOps::UninitVal()); |
1543 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefVars, emitPrevGCrefVars); |
1544 | igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefRegs = emitPrevGCrefRegs; |
1545 | igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevByrefRegs = emitPrevByrefRegs; |
1546 | |
1547 | VarSetOps::AssignNoCopy(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefVars, VarSetOps::UninitVal()); |
1548 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefVars, emitInitGCrefVars); |
1549 | igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefRegs = emitInitGCrefRegs; |
1550 | igPh->igPhData->igPhInitByrefRegs = emitInitByrefRegs; |
1551 | |
1552 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
1553 | emitTotalPhIGcnt += 1; |
1554 | #endif |
1555 | |
1556 | // Mark function prologs and epilogs properly in the igFlags bits. These bits |
1557 | // will get used and propagated when the placeholder is converted to a non-placeholder |
1558 | // during prolog/epilog generation. |
1559 | |
1560 | if (igType == IGPT_EPILOG) |
1561 | { |
1562 | igPh->igFlags |= IGF_EPILOG; |
1563 | } |
1564 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1565 | else if (igType == IGPT_FUNCLET_PROLOG) |
1566 | { |
1567 | igPh->igFlags |= IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG; |
1568 | } |
1569 | else if (igType == IGPT_FUNCLET_EPILOG) |
1570 | { |
1571 | igPh->igFlags |= IGF_FUNCLET_EPILOG; |
1572 | } |
1573 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1574 | |
1575 | /* Link it into the placeholder list */ |
1576 | |
1577 | if (emitPlaceholderList) |
1578 | { |
1579 | emitPlaceholderLast->igPhData->igPhNext = igPh; |
1580 | } |
1581 | else |
1582 | { |
1583 | emitPlaceholderList = igPh; |
1584 | } |
1585 | |
1586 | emitPlaceholderLast = igPh; |
1587 | |
1588 | // Give an estimated size of this placeholder IG and |
1589 | // increment emitCurCodeOffset since we are not calling emitNewIG() |
1590 | // |
1591 | emitCurIGsize += MAX_PLACEHOLDER_IG_SIZE; |
1592 | emitCurCodeOffset += emitCurIGsize; |
1593 | |
1594 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1595 | // Add the appropriate IP mapping debugging record for this placeholder |
1596 | // group. genExitCode() adds the mapping for main function epilogs. |
1597 | if (emitComp->opts.compDbgInfo) |
1598 | { |
1599 | if (igType == IGPT_FUNCLET_PROLOG) |
1600 | { |
1601 | codeGen->genIPmappingAdd((IL_OFFSETX)ICorDebugInfo::PROLOG, true); |
1602 | } |
1603 | else if (igType == IGPT_FUNCLET_EPILOG) |
1604 | { |
1605 | codeGen->genIPmappingAdd((IL_OFFSETX)ICorDebugInfo::EPILOG, true); |
1606 | } |
1607 | } |
1608 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1609 | |
1610 | /* Start a new IG if more code follows */ |
1611 | |
1612 | if (last) |
1613 | { |
1614 | emitCurIG = nullptr; |
1615 | } |
1616 | else |
1617 | { |
1618 | if (igType == IGPT_EPILOG |
1619 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1620 | || igType == IGPT_FUNCLET_EPILOG |
1621 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1622 | ) |
1623 | { |
1624 | // If this was an epilog, then assume this is the end of any currently in progress |
1625 | // no-GC region. If a block after the epilog needs to be no-GC, it needs to call |
1626 | // emitter::emitDisableGC() directly. This behavior is depended upon by the fast |
1627 | // tailcall implementation, which disables GC at the beginning of argument setup, |
1628 | // but assumes that after the epilog it will be re-enabled. |
1629 | emitNoGCIG = false; |
1630 | } |
1631 | |
1632 | emitNewIG(); |
1633 | |
1634 | // We don't know what the GC ref state will be at the end of the placeholder |
1635 | // group. So, force the next IG to store all the GC ref state variables; |
1636 | // don't omit them because emitPrev* is the same as emitInit*, because emitPrev* |
1637 | // will be inaccurate. (Note that, currently, GCrefRegs and ByrefRegs are always |
1638 | // saved anyway.) |
1639 | // |
1640 | // There is no need to re-initialize the emitPrev* variables, as they won't be used |
1641 | // with emitForceStoreGCState==true, and will be re-initialized just before |
1642 | // emitForceStoreGCState is set to false; |
1643 | |
1644 | emitForceStoreGCState = true; |
1645 | |
1646 | /* The group after the placeholder group doesn't get the "propagate" flags */ |
1647 | |
1648 | emitCurIG->igFlags &= ~IGF_PROPAGATE_MASK; |
1649 | } |
1650 | |
1651 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1652 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
1653 | { |
1654 | printf("*************** After placeholder IG creation\n" ); |
1655 | emitDispIGlist(false); |
1656 | } |
1657 | #endif |
1658 | } |
1659 | |
1660 | /***************************************************************************** |
1661 | * |
1662 | * Generate all prologs and epilogs |
1663 | */ |
1664 | |
1665 | void emitter::emitGeneratePrologEpilog() |
1666 | { |
1667 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1668 | unsigned prologCnt = 0; |
1669 | unsigned epilogCnt = 0; |
1670 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1671 | unsigned funcletPrologCnt = 0; |
1672 | unsigned funcletEpilogCnt = 0; |
1673 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1674 | #endif // DEBUG |
1675 | |
1676 | insGroup* igPh; |
1677 | insGroup* igPhNext; |
1678 | |
1679 | // Generating the prolog/epilog is going to destroy the placeholder group, |
1680 | // so save the "next" pointer before that happens. |
1681 | |
1682 | for (igPh = emitPlaceholderList; igPh != nullptr; igPh = igPhNext) |
1683 | { |
1684 | assert(igPh->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER); |
1685 | |
1686 | igPhNext = igPh->igPhData->igPhNext; |
1687 | |
1688 | BasicBlock* igPhBB = igPh->igPhData->igPhBB; |
1689 | |
1690 | switch (igPh->igPhData->igPhType) |
1691 | { |
1692 | case IGPT_PROLOG: // currently unused |
1693 | INDEBUG(++prologCnt); |
1694 | break; |
1695 | |
1696 | case IGPT_EPILOG: |
1697 | INDEBUG(++epilogCnt); |
1698 | emitBegFnEpilog(igPh); |
1699 | codeGen->genFnEpilog(igPhBB); |
1700 | emitEndFnEpilog(); |
1701 | break; |
1702 | |
1703 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1704 | |
1705 | case IGPT_FUNCLET_PROLOG: |
1706 | INDEBUG(++funcletPrologCnt); |
1707 | emitBegFuncletProlog(igPh); |
1708 | codeGen->genFuncletProlog(igPhBB); |
1709 | emitEndFuncletProlog(); |
1710 | break; |
1711 | |
1712 | case IGPT_FUNCLET_EPILOG: |
1713 | INDEBUG(++funcletEpilogCnt); |
1714 | emitBegFuncletEpilog(igPh); |
1715 | codeGen->genFuncletEpilog(); |
1716 | emitEndFuncletEpilog(); |
1717 | break; |
1718 | |
1719 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1720 | |
1721 | default: |
1722 | unreached(); |
1723 | } |
1724 | } |
1725 | |
1726 | #ifdef DEBUG |
1727 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
1728 | { |
1729 | printf("%d prologs, %d epilogs" , prologCnt, epilogCnt); |
1730 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1731 | printf(", %d funclet prologs, %d funclet epilogs" , funcletPrologCnt, funcletEpilogCnt); |
1732 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1733 | printf("\n" ); |
1734 | |
1735 | // prolog/epilog code doesn't use this yet |
1736 | // noway_assert(prologCnt == 1); |
1737 | // noway_assert(epilogCnt == emitEpilogCnt); // Is this correct? |
1738 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1739 | assert(funcletPrologCnt == emitComp->ehFuncletCount()); |
1740 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1741 | } |
1742 | #endif // DEBUG |
1743 | } |
1744 | |
1745 | /***************************************************************************** |
1746 | * |
1747 | * Begin all prolog and epilog generation |
1748 | */ |
1749 | |
1750 | void emitter::emitStartPrologEpilogGeneration() |
1751 | { |
1752 | /* Save the current IG if it's non-empty */ |
1753 | |
1754 | if (emitCurIGnonEmpty()) |
1755 | { |
1756 | emitSavIG(); |
1757 | } |
1758 | else |
1759 | { |
1760 | assert(emitCurIG == nullptr); |
1761 | } |
1762 | } |
1763 | |
1764 | /***************************************************************************** |
1765 | * |
1766 | * Finish all prolog and epilog generation |
1767 | */ |
1768 | |
1769 | void emitter::emitFinishPrologEpilogGeneration() |
1770 | { |
1771 | /* Update the offsets of all the blocks */ |
1772 | |
1773 | emitRecomputeIGoffsets(); |
1774 | |
1775 | /* We should not generate any more code after this */ |
1776 | |
1777 | emitCurIG = nullptr; |
1778 | } |
1779 | |
1780 | /***************************************************************************** |
1781 | * |
1782 | * Common code for prolog / epilog beginning. Convert the placeholder group to actual code IG, |
1783 | * and set it as the current group. |
1784 | */ |
1785 | |
1786 | void emitter::emitBegPrologEpilog(insGroup* igPh) |
1787 | { |
1788 | assert(igPh->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER); |
1789 | |
1790 | /* Save the current IG if it's non-empty */ |
1791 | |
1792 | if (emitCurIGnonEmpty()) |
1793 | { |
1794 | emitSavIG(); |
1795 | } |
1796 | |
1797 | /* Convert the placeholder group to a normal group. |
1798 | * We need to be very careful to re-initialize the IG properly. |
1799 | * It turns out, this means we only need to clear the placeholder bit |
1800 | * and clear the igPhData field, and emitGenIG() will do the rest, |
1801 | * since in the placeholder IG we didn't touch anything that is set by emitAllocIG(). |
1802 | */ |
1803 | |
1804 | igPh->igFlags &= ~IGF_PLACEHOLDER; |
1805 | emitNoGCIG = true; |
1806 | emitForceNewIG = false; |
1807 | |
1808 | /* Set up the GC info that we stored in the placeholder */ |
1809 | |
1810 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars, igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefVars); |
1811 | emitPrevGCrefRegs = igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefRegs; |
1812 | emitPrevByrefRegs = igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevByrefRegs; |
1813 | |
1814 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars, igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefVars); |
1815 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars, igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefVars); |
1816 | emitThisGCrefRegs = emitInitGCrefRegs = igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefRegs; |
1817 | emitThisByrefRegs = emitInitByrefRegs = igPh->igPhData->igPhInitByrefRegs; |
1818 | |
1819 | igPh->igPhData = nullptr; |
1820 | |
1821 | /* Create a non-placeholder group pointer that we'll now use */ |
1822 | |
1823 | insGroup* ig = igPh; |
1824 | |
1825 | /* Set the current function using the function index we stored */ |
1826 | |
1827 | emitComp->funSetCurrentFunc(ig->igFuncIdx); |
1828 | |
1829 | /* Set the new IG as the place to generate code */ |
1830 | |
1831 | emitGenIG(ig); |
1832 | |
1833 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
1834 | |
1835 | /* Don't measure stack depth inside the prolog / epilog, it's misleading */ |
1836 | |
1837 | emitCntStackDepth = 0; |
1838 | |
1839 | assert(emitCurStackLvl == 0); |
1840 | |
1841 | #endif |
1842 | } |
1843 | |
1844 | /***************************************************************************** |
1845 | * |
1846 | * Common code for end of prolog / epilog |
1847 | */ |
1848 | |
1849 | void emitter::emitEndPrologEpilog() |
1850 | { |
1851 | emitNoGCIG = false; |
1852 | |
1853 | /* Save the IG if non-empty */ |
1854 | |
1855 | if (emitCurIGnonEmpty()) |
1856 | { |
1857 | emitSavIG(); |
1858 | } |
1859 | |
1860 | assert(emitCurIGsize <= MAX_PLACEHOLDER_IG_SIZE); |
1861 | |
1862 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
1863 | /* Reset the stack depth values */ |
1864 | |
1865 | emitCurStackLvl = 0; |
1866 | emitCntStackDepth = sizeof(int); |
1867 | #endif |
1868 | } |
1869 | |
1870 | /***************************************************************************** |
1871 | * |
1872 | * Begin generating a main function epilog. |
1873 | */ |
1874 | |
1875 | void emitter::emitBegFnEpilog(insGroup* igPh) |
1876 | { |
1877 | emitEpilogCnt++; |
1878 | |
1879 | emitBegPrologEpilog(igPh); |
1880 | |
1881 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
1882 | |
1883 | EpilogList* el = new (emitComp, CMK_GC) EpilogList(); |
1884 | |
1885 | if (emitEpilogLast != nullptr) |
1886 | { |
1887 | emitEpilogLast->elNext = el; |
1888 | } |
1889 | else |
1890 | { |
1891 | emitEpilogList = el; |
1892 | } |
1893 | |
1894 | emitEpilogLast = el; |
1895 | |
1896 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
1897 | } |
1898 | |
1899 | /***************************************************************************** |
1900 | * |
1901 | * Finish generating a funclet epilog. |
1902 | */ |
1903 | |
1904 | void emitter::emitEndFnEpilog() |
1905 | { |
1906 | emitEndPrologEpilog(); |
1907 | |
1908 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
1909 | assert(emitEpilogLast != nullptr); |
1910 | |
1911 | UNATIVE_OFFSET epilogBegCodeOffset = emitEpilogLast->elLoc.CodeOffset(this); |
1912 | UNATIVE_OFFSET epilogExitSeqStartCodeOffset = emitExitSeqBegLoc.CodeOffset(this); |
1913 | UNATIVE_OFFSET newSize = epilogExitSeqStartCodeOffset - epilogBegCodeOffset; |
1914 | |
1915 | /* Compute total epilog size */ |
1916 | assert(emitEpilogSize == 0 || emitEpilogSize == newSize); // All epilogs must be identical |
1917 | emitEpilogSize = newSize; |
1918 | |
1919 | UNATIVE_OFFSET epilogEndCodeOffset = emitCodeOffset(emitCurIG, emitCurOffset()); |
1920 | assert(epilogExitSeqStartCodeOffset != epilogEndCodeOffset); |
1921 | |
1922 | newSize = epilogEndCodeOffset - epilogExitSeqStartCodeOffset; |
1923 | if (newSize < emitExitSeqSize) |
1924 | { |
1925 | // We expect either the epilog to be the same every time, or that |
1926 | // one will be a ret or a ret <n> and others will be a jmp addr or jmp [addr]; |
1927 | // we make the epilogs the minimum of these. Note that this ONLY works |
1928 | // because the only instruction is the last one and thus a slight |
1929 | // underestimation of the epilog size is harmless (since the EIP |
1930 | // can not be between instructions). |
1931 | assert(emitEpilogCnt == 1 || |
1932 | (emitExitSeqSize - newSize) <= 5 // delta between size of various forms of jmp (size is either 6 or 5) |
1933 | // and various forms of ret (size is either 1 or 3). The combination can |
1934 | // be anything been 1 and 5. |
1935 | ); |
1936 | emitExitSeqSize = newSize; |
1937 | } |
1938 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
1939 | } |
1940 | |
1941 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1942 | |
1943 | /***************************************************************************** |
1944 | * |
1945 | * Begin generating a funclet prolog. |
1946 | */ |
1947 | |
1948 | void emitter::emitBegFuncletProlog(insGroup* igPh) |
1949 | { |
1950 | emitBegPrologEpilog(igPh); |
1951 | } |
1952 | |
1953 | /***************************************************************************** |
1954 | * |
1955 | * Finish generating a funclet prolog. |
1956 | */ |
1957 | |
1958 | void emitter::emitEndFuncletProlog() |
1959 | { |
1960 | emitEndPrologEpilog(); |
1961 | } |
1962 | |
1963 | /***************************************************************************** |
1964 | * |
1965 | * Begin generating a funclet epilog. |
1966 | */ |
1967 | |
1968 | void emitter::emitBegFuncletEpilog(insGroup* igPh) |
1969 | { |
1970 | emitBegPrologEpilog(igPh); |
1971 | } |
1972 | |
1973 | /***************************************************************************** |
1974 | * |
1975 | * Finish generating a funclet epilog. |
1976 | */ |
1977 | |
1978 | void emitter::emitEndFuncletEpilog() |
1979 | { |
1980 | emitEndPrologEpilog(); |
1981 | } |
1982 | |
1983 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
1984 | |
1985 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
1986 | |
1987 | // |
1988 | // emitter::emitStartEpilog: |
1989 | // Mark the current position so that we can later compute the total epilog size. |
1990 | // |
1991 | void emitter::emitStartEpilog() |
1992 | { |
1993 | assert(emitEpilogLast != nullptr); |
1994 | emitEpilogLast->elLoc.CaptureLocation(this); |
1995 | } |
1996 | |
1997 | /***************************************************************************** |
1998 | * |
1999 | * Return non-zero if the current method only has one epilog, which is |
2000 | * at the very end of the method body. |
2001 | */ |
2002 | |
2003 | bool emitter::emitHasEpilogEnd() |
2004 | { |
2005 | if (emitEpilogCnt == 1 && (emitIGlast->igFlags & IGF_EPILOG)) // This wouldn't work for funclets |
2006 | return true; |
2007 | else |
2008 | return false; |
2009 | } |
2010 | |
2011 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
2012 | |
2013 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
2014 | |
2015 | /***************************************************************************** |
2016 | * |
2017 | * Mark the beginning of the epilog exit sequence by remembering our position. |
2018 | */ |
2019 | |
2020 | void emitter::emitStartExitSeq() |
2021 | { |
2022 | assert(emitComp->compGeneratingEpilog); |
2023 | |
2024 | emitExitSeqBegLoc.CaptureLocation(this); |
2025 | } |
2026 | |
2027 | #endif // _TARGET_XARCH_ |
2028 | |
2029 | /***************************************************************************** |
2030 | * |
2031 | * The code generator tells us the range of GC ref locals through this |
2032 | * method. Needless to say, locals and temps should be allocated so that |
2033 | * the size of the range is as small as possible. |
2034 | * |
2035 | * offsLo - The FP offset from which the GC pointer range starts. |
2036 | * offsHi - The FP offset at which the GC pointer region ends (exclusive). |
2037 | */ |
2038 | |
2039 | void emitter::emitSetFrameRangeGCRs(int offsLo, int offsHi) |
2040 | { |
2041 | assert(emitComp->compGeneratingProlog); |
2042 | assert(offsHi > offsLo); |
2043 | |
2044 | #ifdef DEBUG |
2045 | |
2046 | // A total of 47254 methods compiled. |
2047 | // |
2048 | // GC ref frame variable counts: |
2049 | // |
2050 | // <= 0 ===> 43175 count ( 91% of total) |
2051 | // 1 .. 1 ===> 2367 count ( 96% of total) |
2052 | // 2 .. 2 ===> 887 count ( 98% of total) |
2053 | // 3 .. 5 ===> 579 count ( 99% of total) |
2054 | // 6 .. 10 ===> 141 count ( 99% of total) |
2055 | // 11 .. 20 ===> 40 count ( 99% of total) |
2056 | // 21 .. 50 ===> 42 count ( 99% of total) |
2057 | // 51 .. 128 ===> 15 count ( 99% of total) |
2058 | // 129 .. 256 ===> 4 count ( 99% of total) |
2059 | // 257 .. 512 ===> 4 count (100% of total) |
2060 | // 513 .. 1024 ===> 0 count (100% of total) |
2061 | |
2062 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
2063 | { |
2064 | unsigned count = (offsHi - offsLo) / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
2065 | printf("%u tracked GC refs are at stack offsets " , count); |
2066 | |
2067 | if (offsLo >= 0) |
2068 | { |
2069 | printf(" %04X ... %04X\n" , offsLo, offsHi); |
2070 | assert(offsHi >= 0); |
2071 | } |
2072 | else |
2073 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) && defined(PROFILING_SUPPORTED) |
2074 | if (!emitComp->compIsProfilerHookNeeded()) |
2075 | #endif |
2076 | { |
2077 | #ifdef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
2078 | // doesn't have to be all negative on amd |
2079 | printf("-%04X ... %04X\n" , -offsLo, offsHi); |
2080 | #else |
2081 | printf("-%04X ... -%04X\n" , -offsLo, -offsHi); |
2082 | assert(offsHi <= 0); |
2083 | #endif |
2084 | } |
2085 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) && defined(PROFILING_SUPPORTED) |
2086 | else |
2087 | { |
2088 | // Under profiler due to prespilling of arguments, offHi need not be < 0 |
2089 | if (offsHi < 0) |
2090 | printf("-%04X ... -%04X\n" , -offsLo, -offsHi); |
2091 | else |
2092 | printf("-%04X ... %04X\n" , -offsLo, offsHi); |
2093 | } |
2094 | #endif |
2095 | } |
2096 | |
2097 | #endif // DEBUG |
2098 | |
2099 | assert(((offsHi - offsLo) % TARGET_POINTER_SIZE) == 0); |
2100 | assert((offsLo % TARGET_POINTER_SIZE) == 0); |
2101 | assert((offsHi % TARGET_POINTER_SIZE) == 0); |
2102 | |
2103 | emitGCrFrameOffsMin = offsLo; |
2104 | emitGCrFrameOffsMax = offsHi; |
2105 | emitGCrFrameOffsCnt = (offsHi - offsLo) / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
2106 | } |
2107 | |
2108 | /***************************************************************************** |
2109 | * |
2110 | * The code generator tells us the range of local variables through this |
2111 | * method. |
2112 | */ |
2113 | |
2114 | void emitter::emitSetFrameRangeLcls(int offsLo, int offsHi) |
2115 | { |
2116 | } |
2117 | |
2118 | /***************************************************************************** |
2119 | * |
2120 | * The code generator tells us the range of used arguments through this |
2121 | * method. |
2122 | */ |
2123 | |
2124 | void emitter::emitSetFrameRangeArgs(int offsLo, int offsHi) |
2125 | { |
2126 | } |
2127 | |
2128 | /***************************************************************************** |
2129 | * |
2130 | * A conversion table used to map an operand size value (in bytes) into its |
2131 | * small encoding (0 through 3), and vice versa. |
2132 | */ |
2133 | |
2134 | const emitter::opSize emitter::emitSizeEncode[] = { |
2135 | emitter::OPSZ1, emitter::OPSZ2, OPSIZE_INVALID, emitter::OPSZ4, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, |
2136 | emitter::OPSZ8, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, |
2137 | OPSIZE_INVALID, emitter::OPSZ16, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, |
2138 | OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, |
2139 | OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, OPSIZE_INVALID, emitter::OPSZ32, |
2140 | }; |
2141 | |
2142 | const emitAttr emitter::emitSizeDecode[emitter::OPSZ_COUNT] = {EA_1BYTE, EA_2BYTE, EA_4BYTE, |
2143 | EA_8BYTE, EA_16BYTE, EA_32BYTE}; |
2144 | |
2145 | /***************************************************************************** |
2146 | * |
2147 | * Allocate an instruction descriptor for an instruction that uses both |
2148 | * a displacement and a constant. |
2149 | */ |
2150 | |
2151 | emitter::instrDesc* emitter::emitNewInstrCnsDsp(emitAttr size, target_ssize_t cns, int dsp) |
2152 | { |
2153 | if (dsp == 0) |
2154 | { |
2155 | if (instrDesc::fitsInSmallCns(cns)) |
2156 | { |
2157 | instrDesc* id = emitAllocInstr(size); |
2158 | |
2159 | id->idSmallCns(cns); |
2160 | |
2161 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
2162 | emitSmallCnsCnt++; |
2163 | emitSmallCns[cns - ID_MIN_SMALL_CNS]++; |
2164 | emitSmallDspCnt++; |
2165 | #endif |
2166 | |
2167 | return id; |
2168 | } |
2169 | else |
2170 | { |
2171 | instrDescCns* id = emitAllocInstrCns(size); |
2172 | |
2173 | id->idSetIsLargeCns(); |
2174 | id->idcCnsVal = cns; |
2175 | |
2176 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
2177 | emitLargeCnsCnt++; |
2178 | emitSmallDspCnt++; |
2179 | #endif |
2180 | |
2181 | return id; |
2182 | } |
2183 | } |
2184 | else |
2185 | { |
2186 | if (instrDesc::fitsInSmallCns(cns)) |
2187 | { |
2188 | instrDescDsp* id = emitAllocInstrDsp(size); |
2189 | |
2190 | id->idSetIsLargeDsp(); |
2191 | id->iddDspVal = dsp; |
2192 | |
2193 | id->idSmallCns(cns); |
2194 | |
2195 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
2196 | emitLargeDspCnt++; |
2197 | emitSmallCnsCnt++; |
2198 | emitSmallCns[cns - ID_MIN_SMALL_CNS]++; |
2199 | #endif |
2200 | |
2201 | return id; |
2202 | } |
2203 | else |
2204 | { |
2205 | instrDescCnsDsp* id = emitAllocInstrCnsDsp(size); |
2206 | |
2207 | id->idSetIsLargeCns(); |
2208 | id->iddcCnsVal = cns; |
2209 | |
2210 | id->idSetIsLargeDsp(); |
2211 | id->iddcDspVal = dsp; |
2212 | |
2213 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
2214 | emitLargeDspCnt++; |
2215 | emitLargeCnsCnt++; |
2216 | #endif |
2217 | |
2218 | return id; |
2219 | } |
2220 | } |
2221 | } |
2222 | |
2223 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
2224 | // emitNoGChelper: Returns true if garbage collection won't happen within the helper call. |
2225 | // |
2226 | // Notes: |
2227 | // There is no need to record live pointers for such call sites. |
2228 | // |
2229 | // Arguments: |
2230 | // helpFunc - a helper signature for the call, can be CORINFO_HELP_UNDEF, that means that the call is not a helper. |
2231 | // |
2232 | // Return value: |
2233 | // true if GC can't happen within this call, false otherwise. |
2234 | bool emitter::emitNoGChelper(CorInfoHelpFunc helpFunc) |
2235 | { |
2236 | // TODO-Throughput: Make this faster (maybe via a simple table of bools?) |
2237 | |
2238 | switch (helpFunc) |
2239 | { |
2240 | case CORINFO_HELP_UNDEF: |
2241 | return false; |
2242 | |
2243 | case CORINFO_HELP_PROF_FCN_LEAVE: |
2244 | case CORINFO_HELP_PROF_FCN_ENTER: |
2245 | #if defined(_TARGET_XARCH_) |
2246 | case CORINFO_HELP_PROF_FCN_TAILCALL: |
2247 | #endif |
2248 | case CORINFO_HELP_LLSH: |
2249 | case CORINFO_HELP_LRSH: |
2250 | case CORINFO_HELP_LRSZ: |
2251 | |
2252 | // case CORINFO_HELP_LMUL: |
2253 | // case CORINFO_HELP_LDIV: |
2254 | // case CORINFO_HELP_LMOD: |
2255 | // case CORINFO_HELP_ULDIV: |
2256 | // case CORINFO_HELP_ULMOD: |
2257 | |
2258 | #ifdef _TARGET_X86_ |
2259 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF_EAX: |
2260 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF_ECX: |
2261 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF_EBX: |
2262 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF_EBP: |
2263 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF_ESI: |
2264 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF_EDI: |
2265 | |
2266 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF_EAX: |
2267 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF_ECX: |
2268 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF_EBX: |
2269 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF_EBP: |
2270 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF_ESI: |
2271 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF_EDI: |
2272 | #endif |
2273 | |
2274 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_REF: |
2275 | case CORINFO_HELP_CHECKED_ASSIGN_REF: |
2276 | case CORINFO_HELP_ASSIGN_BYREF: |
2277 | |
2278 | case CORINFO_HELP_GETSHARED_GCSTATIC_BASE_NOCTOR: |
2279 | case CORINFO_HELP_GETSHARED_NONGCSTATIC_BASE_NOCTOR: |
2280 | |
2281 | case CORINFO_HELP_INIT_PINVOKE_FRAME: |
2282 | return true; |
2283 | |
2284 | default: |
2285 | return false; |
2286 | } |
2287 | } |
2288 | |
2289 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
2290 | // emitNoGChelper: Returns true if garbage collection won't happen within the helper call. |
2291 | // |
2292 | // Notes: |
2293 | // There is no need to record live pointers for such call sites. |
2294 | // |
2295 | // Arguments: |
2296 | // methHnd - a method handle for the call. |
2297 | // |
2298 | // Return value: |
2299 | // true if GC can't happen within this call, false otherwise. |
2300 | bool emitter::emitNoGChelper(CORINFO_METHOD_HANDLE methHnd) |
2301 | { |
2302 | CorInfoHelpFunc helpFunc = Compiler::eeGetHelperNum(methHnd); |
2303 | if (helpFunc == CORINFO_HELP_UNDEF) |
2304 | { |
2305 | return false; |
2306 | } |
2307 | return emitNoGChelper(helpFunc); |
2308 | } |
2309 | |
2310 | /***************************************************************************** |
2311 | * |
2312 | * Mark the current spot as having a label. |
2313 | */ |
2314 | |
2315 | void* emitter::emitAddLabel(VARSET_VALARG_TP GCvars, regMaskTP gcrefRegs, regMaskTP byrefRegs, BOOL isFinallyTarget) |
2316 | { |
2317 | /* Create a new IG if the current one is non-empty */ |
2318 | |
2319 | if (emitCurIGnonEmpty()) |
2320 | { |
2321 | emitNxtIG(); |
2322 | } |
2323 | |
2324 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars, GCvars); |
2325 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars, GCvars); |
2326 | emitThisGCrefRegs = emitInitGCrefRegs = gcrefRegs; |
2327 | emitThisByrefRegs = emitInitByrefRegs = byrefRegs; |
2328 | |
2329 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS && defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
2330 | if (isFinallyTarget) |
2331 | { |
2332 | emitCurIG->igFlags |= IGF_FINALLY_TARGET; |
2333 | } |
2334 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS && defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
2335 | |
2336 | #ifdef DEBUG |
2337 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
2338 | { |
2339 | printf("Label: IG%02u, GCvars=%s " , emitCurIG->igNum, VarSetOps::ToString(emitComp, GCvars)); |
2340 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, GCvars); |
2341 | printf(", gcrefRegs=" ); |
2342 | printRegMaskInt(gcrefRegs); |
2343 | emitDispRegSet(gcrefRegs); |
2344 | printf(", byrefRegs=" ); |
2345 | printRegMaskInt(byrefRegs); |
2346 | emitDispRegSet(byrefRegs); |
2347 | printf("\n" ); |
2348 | } |
2349 | #endif |
2350 | return emitCurIG; |
2351 | } |
2352 | |
2353 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARMARCH_ |
2354 | |
2355 | // Does the argument location point to an IG at the end of a function or funclet? |
2356 | // We can ignore the codePos part of the location, since it doesn't affect the |
2357 | // determination. If 'emitLocNextFragment' is non-NULL, it indicates the first |
2358 | // IG of the next fragment, so it represents a function end. |
2359 | bool emitter::emitIsFuncEnd(emitLocation* emitLoc, emitLocation* emitLocNextFragment /* = NULL */) |
2360 | { |
2361 | assert(emitLoc); |
2362 | |
2363 | insGroup* ig = emitLoc->GetIG(); |
2364 | assert(ig); |
2365 | |
2366 | // Are we at the end of the IG list? |
2367 | if ((emitLocNextFragment != NULL) && (ig->igNext == emitLocNextFragment->GetIG())) |
2368 | return true; |
2369 | |
2370 | // Safety check |
2371 | if (ig->igNext == NULL) |
2372 | return true; |
2373 | |
2374 | // Is the next IG the start of a funclet prolog? |
2375 | if (ig->igNext->igFlags & IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG) |
2376 | return true; |
2377 | |
2378 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
2379 | |
2380 | // Is the next IG a placeholder group for a funclet prolog? |
2381 | if ((ig->igNext->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER) && (ig->igNext->igPhData->igPhType == IGPT_FUNCLET_PROLOG)) |
2382 | { |
2383 | return true; |
2384 | } |
2385 | |
2386 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
2387 | |
2388 | return false; |
2389 | } |
2390 | |
2391 | /***************************************************************************** |
2392 | * |
2393 | * Split the region from 'startLoc' to 'endLoc' into fragments by calling |
2394 | * a callback function to indicate the beginning of a fragment. The initial code, |
2395 | * starting at 'startLoc', doesn't get a callback, but the first code fragment, |
2396 | * about 'maxSplitSize' bytes out does, as does the beginning of each fragment |
2397 | * after that. There is no callback for the end (only the beginning of the last |
2398 | * fragment gets a callback). A fragment must contain at least one instruction |
2399 | * group. It should be smaller than 'maxSplitSize', although it may be larger to |
2400 | * satisfy the "at least one instruction group" rule. Do not split prologs or |
2401 | * epilogs. (Currently, prologs exist in a single instruction group at the main |
2402 | * function beginning, so they aren't split. Funclets, however, might span IGs, |
2403 | * so we can't split in between them.) |
2404 | * |
2405 | * Note that the locations must be the start of instruction groups; the part of |
2406 | * the location indicating offset within a group must be zero. |
2407 | * |
2408 | * If 'startLoc' is NULL, it means the start of the code. |
2409 | * If 'endLoc' is NULL, it means the end of the code. |
2410 | */ |
2411 | |
2412 | void emitter::emitSplit(emitLocation* startLoc, |
2413 | emitLocation* endLoc, |
2414 | UNATIVE_OFFSET maxSplitSize, |
2415 | void* context, |
2416 | emitSplitCallbackType callbackFunc) |
2417 | { |
2418 | insGroup* igStart = (startLoc == NULL) ? emitIGlist : startLoc->GetIG(); |
2419 | insGroup* igEnd = (endLoc == NULL) ? NULL : endLoc->GetIG(); |
2420 | insGroup* igPrev; |
2421 | insGroup* ig; |
2422 | insGroup* igLastReported; |
2423 | insGroup* igLastCandidate; |
2424 | UNATIVE_OFFSET curSize; |
2425 | UNATIVE_OFFSET candidateSize; |
2426 | |
2427 | for (igPrev = NULL, ig = igLastReported = igStart, igLastCandidate = NULL, candidateSize = 0, curSize = 0; |
2428 | ig != igEnd && ig != NULL; igPrev = ig, ig = ig->igNext) |
2429 | { |
2430 | // Keep looking until we've gone past the maximum split size |
2431 | if (curSize >= maxSplitSize) |
2432 | { |
2433 | bool reportCandidate = true; |
2434 | |
2435 | // Is there a candidate? |
2436 | if (igLastCandidate == NULL) |
2437 | { |
2438 | #ifdef DEBUG |
2439 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
2440 | printf("emitSplit: can't split at IG%02u; we don't have a candidate to report\n" , ig->igNum); |
2441 | #endif |
2442 | reportCandidate = false; |
2443 | } |
2444 | |
2445 | // Don't report the same thing twice (this also happens for the first block, since igLastReported is |
2446 | // initialized to igStart). |
2447 | if (igLastCandidate == igLastReported) |
2448 | { |
2449 | #ifdef DEBUG |
2450 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
2451 | printf("emitSplit: can't split at IG%02u; we already reported it\n" , igLastCandidate->igNum); |
2452 | #endif |
2453 | reportCandidate = false; |
2454 | } |
2455 | |
2456 | // Report it! |
2457 | if (reportCandidate) |
2458 | { |
2459 | #ifdef DEBUG |
2460 | if (EMITVERBOSE && (candidateSize >= maxSplitSize)) |
2461 | printf("emitSplit: split at IG%02u is size %d, larger than requested maximum size of %d\n" , |
2462 | igLastCandidate->igNum, candidateSize, maxSplitSize); |
2463 | #endif |
2464 | |
2465 | // hand memory ownership to the callback function |
2466 | emitLocation* pEmitLoc = new (emitComp, CMK_Unknown) emitLocation(igLastCandidate); |
2467 | callbackFunc(context, pEmitLoc); |
2468 | igLastReported = igLastCandidate; |
2469 | igLastCandidate = NULL; |
2470 | curSize -= candidateSize; |
2471 | } |
2472 | } |
2473 | |
2474 | // Update the current candidate to be this block, if it isn't in the middle of a |
2475 | // prolog or epilog, which we can't split. All we know is that certain |
2476 | // IGs are marked as prolog or epilog. We don't actually know if two adjacent |
2477 | // IGs are part of the *same* prolog or epilog, so we have to assume they are. |
2478 | |
2479 | if (igPrev && (((igPrev->igFlags & IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG) && (ig->igFlags & IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG)) || |
2480 | ((igPrev->igFlags & IGF_EPILOG) && (ig->igFlags & IGF_EPILOG)))) |
2481 | { |
2482 | // We can't update the candidate |
2483 | } |
2484 | else |
2485 | { |
2486 | igLastCandidate = ig; |
2487 | candidateSize = curSize; |
2488 | } |
2489 | |
2490 | curSize += ig->igSize; |
2491 | |
2492 | } // end for loop |
2493 | } |
2494 | |
2495 | /***************************************************************************** |
2496 | * |
2497 | * Given an instruction group, find the array of instructions (instrDesc) and |
2498 | * number of instructions in the array. If the IG is the current IG, we assume |
2499 | * that igData does NOT hold the instructions; they are unsaved and pointed |
2500 | * to by emitCurIGfreeBase. |
2501 | * |
2502 | * This function can't be called for placeholder groups, which have no instrDescs. |
2503 | */ |
2504 | |
2505 | void emitter::emitGetInstrDescs(insGroup* ig, instrDesc** id, int* insCnt) |
2506 | { |
2507 | assert(!(ig->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER)); |
2508 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
2509 | { |
2510 | *id = (instrDesc*)emitCurIGfreeBase; |
2511 | *insCnt = emitCurIGinsCnt; |
2512 | } |
2513 | else |
2514 | { |
2515 | *id = (instrDesc*)ig->igData; |
2516 | *insCnt = ig->igInsCnt; |
2517 | } |
2518 | |
2519 | assert(*id); |
2520 | } |
2521 | |
2522 | /***************************************************************************** |
2523 | * |
2524 | * Given a location (an 'emitLocation'), find the instruction group (IG) and |
2525 | * instruction descriptor (instrDesc) corresponding to that location. Returns |
2526 | * 'true' if there is an instruction, 'false' if there is no instruction |
2527 | * (i.e., we're at the end of the instruction list). Also, optionally return |
2528 | * the number of instructions that follow that instruction in the IG (in *pinsRemaining, |
2529 | * if pinsRemaining is non-NULL), which can be used for iterating over the |
2530 | * remaining instrDescs in the IG. |
2531 | * |
2532 | * We assume that emitCurIG points to the end of the instructions we care about. |
2533 | * For the prologs or epilogs, it points to the last IG of the prolog or epilog |
2534 | * that is being generated. For body code gen, it points to the place we are currently |
2535 | * adding code, namely, the end of currently generated code. |
2536 | */ |
2537 | |
2538 | bool emitter::emitGetLocationInfo(emitLocation* emitLoc, |
2539 | insGroup** pig, |
2540 | instrDesc** pid, |
2541 | int* pinsRemaining /* = NULL */) |
2542 | { |
2543 | assert(emitLoc != nullptr); |
2544 | assert(emitLoc->Valid()); |
2545 | assert(emitLoc->GetIG() != nullptr); |
2546 | assert(pig != nullptr); |
2547 | assert(pid != nullptr); |
2548 | |
2549 | insGroup* ig = emitLoc->GetIG(); |
2550 | instrDesc* id; |
2551 | int insNum = emitLoc->GetInsNum(); |
2552 | int insCnt; |
2553 | |
2554 | emitGetInstrDescs(ig, &id, &insCnt); |
2555 | assert(insNum <= insCnt); |
2556 | |
2557 | // There is a special-case: if the insNum points to the end, then we "wrap" and |
2558 | // consider that the instruction it is pointing at is actually the first instruction |
2559 | // of the next non-empty IG (which has its own valid emitLocation). This handles the |
2560 | // case where you capture a location, then the next instruction creates a new IG. |
2561 | |
2562 | if (insNum == insCnt) |
2563 | { |
2564 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
2565 | { |
2566 | // No instructions beyond the current location. |
2567 | return false; |
2568 | } |
2569 | |
2570 | for (ig = ig->igNext; ig; ig = ig->igNext) |
2571 | { |
2572 | emitGetInstrDescs(ig, &id, &insCnt); |
2573 | |
2574 | if (insCnt > 0) |
2575 | { |
2576 | insNum = 0; // Pretend the index is 0 -- the first instruction |
2577 | break; |
2578 | } |
2579 | |
2580 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
2581 | { |
2582 | // There aren't any instructions in the current IG, and this is |
2583 | // the current location, so we're at the end. |
2584 | return false; |
2585 | } |
2586 | } |
2587 | |
2588 | if (ig == NULL) |
2589 | { |
2590 | // 'ig' can't be NULL, or we went past the current IG represented by 'emitCurIG'. |
2591 | // Perhaps 'loc' was corrupt coming in? |
2592 | noway_assert(!"corrupt emitter location" ); |
2593 | return false; |
2594 | } |
2595 | } |
2596 | |
2597 | // Now find the instrDesc within this group that corresponds to the location |
2598 | |
2599 | assert(insNum < insCnt); |
2600 | |
2601 | int i; |
2602 | for (i = 0; i != insNum; ++i) |
2603 | { |
2604 | castto(id, BYTE*) += emitSizeOfInsDsc(id); |
2605 | } |
2606 | |
2607 | // Return the info we found |
2608 | |
2609 | *pig = ig; |
2610 | *pid = id; |
2611 | |
2612 | if (pinsRemaining) |
2613 | { |
2614 | *pinsRemaining = insCnt - insNum - 1; |
2615 | } |
2616 | |
2617 | return true; |
2618 | } |
2619 | |
2620 | /***************************************************************************** |
2621 | * |
2622 | * Compute the next instrDesc, either in this IG, or in a subsequent IG. 'id' |
2623 | * will point to this instrDesc. 'ig' and 'insRemaining' will also be updated. |
2624 | * Returns true if there is an instruction, or false if we've iterated over all |
2625 | * the instructions up to the current instruction (based on 'emitCurIG'). |
2626 | */ |
2627 | |
2628 | bool emitter::emitNextID(insGroup*& ig, instrDesc*& id, int& insRemaining) |
2629 | { |
2630 | if (insRemaining > 0) |
2631 | { |
2632 | castto(id, BYTE*) += emitSizeOfInsDsc(id); |
2633 | --insRemaining; |
2634 | return true; |
2635 | } |
2636 | |
2637 | // We're out of instrDesc in 'ig'. Is this the current IG? If so, we're done. |
2638 | |
2639 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
2640 | { |
2641 | return false; |
2642 | } |
2643 | |
2644 | for (ig = ig->igNext; ig; ig = ig->igNext) |
2645 | { |
2646 | int insCnt; |
2647 | emitGetInstrDescs(ig, &id, &insCnt); |
2648 | |
2649 | if (insCnt > 0) |
2650 | { |
2651 | insRemaining = insCnt - 1; |
2652 | return true; |
2653 | } |
2654 | |
2655 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
2656 | { |
2657 | return false; |
2658 | } |
2659 | } |
2660 | |
2661 | return false; |
2662 | } |
2663 | |
2664 | /***************************************************************************** |
2665 | * |
2666 | * Walk instrDesc's from the location given by 'locFrom', up to the current location. |
2667 | * For each instruction, call the callback function 'processFunc'. 'context' is simply |
2668 | * passed through to the callback function. |
2669 | */ |
2670 | |
2671 | void emitter::emitWalkIDs(emitLocation* locFrom, emitProcessInstrFunc_t processFunc, void* context) |
2672 | { |
2673 | insGroup* ig; |
2674 | instrDesc* id; |
2675 | int insRemaining; |
2676 | |
2677 | if (!emitGetLocationInfo(locFrom, &ig, &id, &insRemaining)) |
2678 | return; // no instructions at the 'from' location |
2679 | |
2680 | do |
2681 | { |
2682 | // process <<id>> |
2683 | (*processFunc)(id, context); |
2684 | |
2685 | } while (emitNextID(ig, id, insRemaining)); |
2686 | } |
2687 | |
2688 | /***************************************************************************** |
2689 | * |
2690 | * A callback function for emitWalkIDs() that calls Compiler::unwindNop(). |
2691 | */ |
2692 | |
2693 | void emitter::emitGenerateUnwindNop(instrDesc* id, void* context) |
2694 | { |
2695 | Compiler* comp = (Compiler*)context; |
2696 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
2697 | comp->unwindNop(id->idCodeSize()); |
2698 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
2699 | comp->unwindNop(); |
2700 | #endif // defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
2701 | } |
2702 | |
2703 | /***************************************************************************** |
2704 | * |
2705 | * emitUnwindNopPadding: call unwindNop() for every instruction from a given |
2706 | * location 'emitLoc' up to the current location. |
2707 | */ |
2708 | |
2709 | void emitter::emitUnwindNopPadding(emitLocation* locFrom, Compiler* comp) |
2710 | { |
2711 | emitWalkIDs(locFrom, emitGenerateUnwindNop, comp); |
2712 | } |
2713 | |
2714 | #endif // _TARGET_ARMARCH_ |
2715 | |
2716 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
2717 | |
2718 | /***************************************************************************** |
2719 | * |
2720 | * Return the instruction size in bytes for the instruction at the specified location. |
2721 | * This is used to assert that the unwind code being generated on ARM has the |
2722 | * same size as the instruction for which it is being generated (since on ARM |
2723 | * the unwind codes have a one-to-one relationship with instructions, and the |
2724 | * unwind codes have an implicit instruction size that must match the instruction size.) |
2725 | * An instruction must exist at the specified location. |
2726 | */ |
2727 | |
2728 | unsigned emitter::emitGetInstructionSize(emitLocation* emitLoc) |
2729 | { |
2730 | insGroup* ig; |
2731 | instrDesc* id; |
2732 | |
2733 | bool anyInstrs = emitGetLocationInfo(emitLoc, &ig, &id); |
2734 | assert(anyInstrs); // There better be an instruction at this location (otherwise, we're at the end of the |
2735 | // instruction list) |
2736 | return id->idCodeSize(); |
2737 | } |
2738 | |
2739 | #endif // defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
2740 | |
2741 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
2742 | #ifdef DEBUG |
2743 | /***************************************************************************** |
2744 | * |
2745 | * Returns the name for the register to use to access frame based variables |
2746 | */ |
2747 | |
2748 | const char* emitter::emitGetFrameReg() |
2749 | { |
2750 | if (emitHasFramePtr) |
2751 | { |
2752 | return STR_FPBASE; |
2753 | } |
2754 | else |
2755 | { |
2756 | return STR_SPBASE; |
2757 | } |
2758 | } |
2759 | |
2760 | /***************************************************************************** |
2761 | * |
2762 | * Display a register set in a readable form. |
2763 | */ |
2764 | |
2765 | void emitter::emitDispRegSet(regMaskTP regs) |
2766 | { |
2767 | regNumber reg; |
2768 | bool sp = false; |
2769 | |
2770 | printf(" {" ); |
2771 | |
2772 | for (reg = REG_FIRST; reg < ACTUAL_REG_COUNT; reg = REG_NEXT(reg)) |
2773 | { |
2774 | if ((regs & genRegMask(reg)) == 0) |
2775 | { |
2776 | continue; |
2777 | } |
2778 | |
2779 | if (sp) |
2780 | { |
2781 | printf(" " ); |
2782 | } |
2783 | else |
2784 | { |
2785 | sp = true; |
2786 | } |
2787 | |
2788 | printf("%s" , emitRegName(reg)); |
2789 | } |
2790 | |
2791 | printf("}" ); |
2792 | } |
2793 | |
2794 | /***************************************************************************** |
2795 | * |
2796 | * Display the current GC ref variable set in a readable form. |
2797 | */ |
2798 | |
2799 | void emitter::emitDispVarSet() |
2800 | { |
2801 | unsigned vn; |
2802 | int of; |
2803 | bool sp = false; |
2804 | |
2805 | for (vn = 0, of = emitGCrFrameOffsMin; vn < emitGCrFrameOffsCnt; vn += 1, of += TARGET_POINTER_SIZE) |
2806 | { |
2807 | if (emitGCrFrameLiveTab[vn]) |
2808 | { |
2809 | if (sp) |
2810 | { |
2811 | printf(" " ); |
2812 | } |
2813 | else |
2814 | { |
2815 | sp = true; |
2816 | } |
2817 | |
2818 | printf("[%s" , emitGetFrameReg()); |
2819 | |
2820 | if (of < 0) |
2821 | { |
2822 | printf("-%02XH" , -of); |
2823 | } |
2824 | else if (of > 0) |
2825 | { |
2826 | printf("+%02XH" , +of); |
2827 | } |
2828 | |
2829 | printf("]" ); |
2830 | } |
2831 | } |
2832 | |
2833 | if (!sp) |
2834 | { |
2835 | printf("none" ); |
2836 | } |
2837 | } |
2838 | |
2839 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
2840 | #endif // DEBUG |
2841 | |
2842 | #if MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET |
2843 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
2844 | // emitSetSecondRetRegGCType: Sets the GC type of the second return register for instrDescCGCA struct. |
2845 | // |
2846 | // Arguments: |
2847 | // id - The large call instr descriptor to set the second GC return register type on. |
2848 | // secondRetSize - The EA_SIZE for second return register type. |
2849 | // |
2850 | // Return Value: |
2851 | // None |
2852 | // |
2853 | |
2854 | void emitter::emitSetSecondRetRegGCType(instrDescCGCA* id, emitAttr secondRetSize) |
2855 | { |
2856 | if (EA_IS_GCREF(secondRetSize)) |
2857 | { |
2858 | id->idSecondGCref(GCT_GCREF); |
2859 | } |
2860 | else if (EA_IS_BYREF(secondRetSize)) |
2861 | { |
2862 | id->idSecondGCref(GCT_BYREF); |
2863 | } |
2864 | else |
2865 | { |
2866 | id->idSecondGCref(GCT_NONE); |
2867 | } |
2868 | } |
2869 | #endif // MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET |
2870 | |
2871 | /***************************************************************************** |
2872 | * |
2873 | * Allocate an instruction descriptor for an indirect call. |
2874 | * |
2875 | * We use two different descriptors to save space - the common case records |
2876 | * no GC variables and has both a very small argument count and an address |
2877 | * mode displacement; the other case records the current GC var set, |
2878 | * the call scope, and an arbitrarily large argument count and the |
2879 | * address mode displacement. |
2880 | */ |
2881 | |
2882 | emitter::instrDesc* emitter::emitNewInstrCallInd(int argCnt, |
2883 | ssize_t disp, |
2884 | VARSET_VALARG_TP GCvars, |
2885 | regMaskTP gcrefRegs, |
2886 | regMaskTP byrefRegs, |
2887 | emitAttr retSizeIn |
2888 | MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET_ONLY_ARG(emitAttr secondRetSize)) |
2889 | { |
2890 | emitAttr retSize = (retSizeIn != EA_UNKNOWN) ? retSizeIn : EA_PTRSIZE; |
2891 | |
2892 | bool gcRefRegsInScratch = ((gcrefRegs & RBM_CALLEE_TRASH) != 0); |
2893 | |
2894 | // Allocate a larger descriptor if any GC values need to be saved |
2895 | // or if we have an absurd number of arguments or a large address |
2896 | // mode displacement, or we have some byref registers |
2897 | // |
2898 | // On Amd64 System V OSs a larger descriptor is also needed if the |
2899 | // call returns a two-register-returned struct and the second |
2900 | // register (RDX) is a GCRef or ByRef pointer. |
2901 | |
2902 | if (!VarSetOps::IsEmpty(emitComp, GCvars) || // any frame GCvars live |
2903 | (gcRefRegsInScratch) || // any register gc refs live in scratch regs |
2904 | (byrefRegs != 0) || // any register byrefs live |
2905 | (disp < AM_DISP_MIN) || // displacement too negative |
2906 | (disp > AM_DISP_MAX) || // displacement too positive |
2907 | (argCnt > ID_MAX_SMALL_CNS) || // too many args |
2908 | (argCnt < 0) // caller pops arguments |
2909 | // There is a second ref/byref return register. |
2910 | MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET_ONLY(|| EA_IS_GCREF_OR_BYREF(secondRetSize))) |
2911 | { |
2912 | instrDescCGCA* id; |
2913 | |
2914 | id = emitAllocInstrCGCA(retSize); |
2915 | |
2916 | id->idSetIsLargeCall(); |
2917 | |
2918 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, id->idcGCvars, GCvars); |
2919 | id->idcGcrefRegs = gcrefRegs; |
2920 | id->idcByrefRegs = byrefRegs; |
2921 | id->idcArgCnt = argCnt; |
2922 | id->idcDisp = disp; |
2923 | |
2924 | #if MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET |
2925 | emitSetSecondRetRegGCType(id, secondRetSize); |
2926 | #endif // MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET |
2927 | |
2928 | return id; |
2929 | } |
2930 | else |
2931 | { |
2932 | instrDesc* id; |
2933 | |
2934 | id = emitNewInstrCns(retSize, argCnt); |
2935 | |
2936 | /* Make sure we didn't waste space unexpectedly */ |
2937 | assert(!id->idIsLargeCns()); |
2938 | |
2939 | /* Store the displacement and make sure the value fit */ |
2940 | id->idAddr()->iiaAddrMode.amDisp = disp; |
2941 | assert(id->idAddr()->iiaAddrMode.amDisp == disp); |
2942 | |
2943 | /* Save the the live GC registers in the unused register fields */ |
2944 | emitEncodeCallGCregs(gcrefRegs, id); |
2945 | |
2946 | return id; |
2947 | } |
2948 | } |
2949 | |
2950 | /***************************************************************************** |
2951 | * |
2952 | * Allocate an instruction descriptor for a direct call. |
2953 | * |
2954 | * We use two different descriptors to save space - the common case records |
2955 | * with no GC variables or byrefs and has a very small argument count, and no |
2956 | * explicit scope; |
2957 | * the other case records the current GC var set, the call scope, |
2958 | * and an arbitrarily large argument count. |
2959 | */ |
2960 | |
2961 | emitter::instrDesc* emitter::emitNewInstrCallDir(int argCnt, |
2962 | VARSET_VALARG_TP GCvars, |
2963 | regMaskTP gcrefRegs, |
2964 | regMaskTP byrefRegs, |
2965 | emitAttr retSizeIn |
2966 | MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET_ONLY_ARG(emitAttr secondRetSize)) |
2967 | { |
2968 | emitAttr retSize = (retSizeIn != EA_UNKNOWN) ? retSizeIn : EA_PTRSIZE; |
2969 | |
2970 | // Allocate a larger descriptor if new GC values need to be saved |
2971 | // or if we have an absurd number of arguments or if we need to |
2972 | // save the scope. |
2973 | // |
2974 | // On Amd64 System V OSs a larger descriptor is also needed if the |
2975 | // call returns a two-register-returned struct and the second |
2976 | // register (RDX) is a GCRef or ByRef pointer. |
2977 | |
2978 | bool gcRefRegsInScratch = ((gcrefRegs & RBM_CALLEE_TRASH) != 0); |
2979 | |
2980 | if (!VarSetOps::IsEmpty(emitComp, GCvars) || // any frame GCvars live |
2981 | gcRefRegsInScratch || // any register gc refs live in scratch regs |
2982 | (byrefRegs != 0) || // any register byrefs live |
2983 | (argCnt > ID_MAX_SMALL_CNS) || // too many args |
2984 | (argCnt < 0) // caller pops arguments |
2985 | // There is a second ref/byref return register. |
2986 | MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET_ONLY(|| EA_IS_GCREF_OR_BYREF(secondRetSize))) |
2987 | { |
2988 | instrDescCGCA* id = emitAllocInstrCGCA(retSize); |
2989 | |
2990 | // printf("Direct call with GC vars / big arg cnt / explicit scope\n"); |
2991 | |
2992 | id->idSetIsLargeCall(); |
2993 | |
2994 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, id->idcGCvars, GCvars); |
2995 | id->idcGcrefRegs = gcrefRegs; |
2996 | id->idcByrefRegs = byrefRegs; |
2997 | id->idcDisp = 0; |
2998 | id->idcArgCnt = argCnt; |
2999 | |
3000 | #if MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET |
3001 | emitSetSecondRetRegGCType(id, secondRetSize); |
3002 | #endif // MULTIREG_HAS_SECOND_GC_RET |
3003 | |
3004 | return id; |
3005 | } |
3006 | else |
3007 | { |
3008 | instrDesc* id = emitNewInstrCns(retSize, argCnt); |
3009 | |
3010 | // printf("Direct call w/o GC vars / big arg cnt / explicit scope\n"); |
3011 | |
3012 | /* Make sure we didn't waste space unexpectedly */ |
3013 | assert(!id->idIsLargeCns()); |
3014 | |
3015 | /* Save the the live GC registers in the unused register fields */ |
3016 | emitEncodeCallGCregs(gcrefRegs, id); |
3017 | |
3018 | return id; |
3019 | } |
3020 | } |
3021 | |
3022 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
3023 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3024 | /***************************************************************************** |
3025 | * |
3026 | * Return a string with the name of the given class field (blank string (not |
3027 | * NULL) is returned when the name isn't available). |
3028 | */ |
3029 | |
3030 | const char* emitter::emitFldName(CORINFO_FIELD_HANDLE fieldVal) |
3031 | { |
3032 | if (emitComp->opts.varNames) |
3033 | { |
3034 | const char* memberName; |
3035 | const char* className; |
3036 | |
3037 | const int TEMP_BUFFER_LEN = 1024; |
3038 | static char buff[TEMP_BUFFER_LEN]; |
3039 | |
3040 | memberName = emitComp->eeGetFieldName(fieldVal, &className); |
3041 | |
3042 | sprintf_s(buff, TEMP_BUFFER_LEN, "'<%s>.%s'" , className, memberName); |
3043 | return buff; |
3044 | } |
3045 | else |
3046 | { |
3047 | return "" ; |
3048 | } |
3049 | } |
3050 | |
3051 | /***************************************************************************** |
3052 | * |
3053 | * Return a string with the name of the given function (blank string (not |
3054 | * NULL) is returned when the name isn't available). |
3055 | */ |
3056 | |
3057 | const char* emitter::emitFncName(CORINFO_METHOD_HANDLE methHnd) |
3058 | { |
3059 | return emitComp->eeGetMethodFullName(methHnd); |
3060 | } |
3061 | |
3062 | #endif // DEBUG |
3063 | |
3064 | /***************************************************************************** |
3065 | * |
3066 | * Be very careful, some instruction descriptors are allocated as "tiny" and |
3067 | * don't have some of the tail fields of instrDesc (in particular, "idInfo"). |
3068 | */ |
3069 | |
3070 | const BYTE emitter::emitFmtToOps[] = { |
3071 | #define IF_DEF(en, op1, op2) ID_OP_##op2, |
3072 | #include "emitfmts.h" |
3073 | }; |
3074 | |
3075 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3076 | const unsigned emitter::emitFmtCount = _countof(emitFmtToOps); |
3077 | #endif |
3078 | |
3079 | /***************************************************************************** |
3080 | * |
3081 | * Display the current instruction group list. |
3082 | */ |
3083 | |
3084 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3085 | |
3086 | void emitter::emitDispIGflags(unsigned flags) |
3087 | { |
3088 | if (flags & IGF_GC_VARS) |
3089 | { |
3090 | printf(", gcvars" ); |
3091 | } |
3092 | if (flags & IGF_BYREF_REGS) |
3093 | { |
3094 | printf(", byref" ); |
3095 | } |
3096 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS && defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3097 | if (flags & IGF_FINALLY_TARGET) |
3098 | { |
3099 | printf(", ftarget" ); |
3100 | } |
3101 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS && defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3102 | if (flags & IGF_FUNCLET_PROLOG) |
3103 | { |
3104 | printf(", funclet prolog" ); |
3105 | } |
3106 | if (flags & IGF_FUNCLET_EPILOG) |
3107 | { |
3108 | printf(", funclet epilog" ); |
3109 | } |
3110 | if (flags & IGF_EPILOG) |
3111 | { |
3112 | printf(", epilog" ); |
3113 | } |
3114 | if (flags & IGF_NOGCINTERRUPT) |
3115 | { |
3116 | printf(", nogc" ); |
3117 | } |
3118 | if (flags & IGF_UPD_ISZ) |
3119 | { |
3120 | printf(", isz" ); |
3121 | } |
3122 | if (flags & IGF_EMIT_ADD) |
3123 | { |
3124 | printf(", emitadd" ); |
3125 | } |
3126 | } |
3127 | |
3128 | void emitter::emitDispIG(insGroup* ig, insGroup* igPrev, bool verbose) |
3129 | { |
3130 | const int TEMP_BUFFER_LEN = 40; |
3131 | char buff[TEMP_BUFFER_LEN]; |
3132 | |
3133 | sprintf_s(buff, TEMP_BUFFER_LEN, "G_M%03u_IG%02u: " , Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, ig->igNum); |
3134 | printf("%s; " , buff); |
3135 | if ((igPrev == nullptr) || (igPrev->igFuncIdx != ig->igFuncIdx)) |
3136 | { |
3137 | printf("func=%02u, " , ig->igFuncIdx); |
3138 | } |
3139 | |
3140 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER) |
3141 | { |
3142 | insGroup* igPh = ig; |
3143 | |
3144 | const char* pszType; |
3145 | switch (igPh->igPhData->igPhType) |
3146 | { |
3147 | case IGPT_PROLOG: |
3148 | pszType = "prolog" ; |
3149 | break; |
3150 | case IGPT_EPILOG: |
3151 | pszType = "epilog" ; |
3152 | break; |
3153 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
3154 | case IGPT_FUNCLET_PROLOG: |
3155 | pszType = "funclet prolog" ; |
3156 | break; |
3157 | case IGPT_FUNCLET_EPILOG: |
3158 | pszType = "funclet epilog" ; |
3159 | break; |
3160 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS |
3161 | default: |
3162 | pszType = "UNKNOWN" ; |
3163 | break; |
3164 | } |
3165 | printf("%s placeholder, next placeholder=" , pszType); |
3166 | if (igPh->igPhData->igPhNext) |
3167 | { |
3168 | printf("IG%02u " , igPh->igPhData->igPhNext->igNum); |
3169 | } |
3170 | else |
3171 | { |
3172 | printf("<END>" ); |
3173 | } |
3174 | |
3175 | if (igPh->igPhData->igPhBB != nullptr) |
3176 | { |
3177 | printf(", %s" , igPh->igPhData->igPhBB->dspToString()); |
3178 | } |
3179 | |
3180 | emitDispIGflags(igPh->igFlags); |
3181 | |
3182 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
3183 | { |
3184 | printf(" <-- Current IG" ); |
3185 | } |
3186 | if (igPh == emitPlaceholderList) |
3187 | { |
3188 | printf(" <-- First placeholder" ); |
3189 | } |
3190 | if (igPh == emitPlaceholderLast) |
3191 | { |
3192 | printf(" <-- Last placeholder" ); |
3193 | } |
3194 | printf("\n" ); |
3195 | |
3196 | printf("%*s; PrevGCVars=%s " , strlen(buff), "" , |
3197 | VarSetOps::ToString(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefVars)); |
3198 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefVars); |
3199 | printf(", PrevGCrefRegs=" ); |
3200 | printRegMaskInt(igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefRegs); |
3201 | emitDispRegSet(igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevGCrefRegs); |
3202 | printf(", PrevByrefRegs=" ); |
3203 | printRegMaskInt(igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevByrefRegs); |
3204 | emitDispRegSet(igPh->igPhData->igPhPrevByrefRegs); |
3205 | printf("\n" ); |
3206 | |
3207 | printf("%*s; InitGCVars=%s " , strlen(buff), "" , |
3208 | VarSetOps::ToString(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefVars)); |
3209 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefVars); |
3210 | printf(", InitGCrefRegs=" ); |
3211 | printRegMaskInt(igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefRegs); |
3212 | emitDispRegSet(igPh->igPhData->igPhInitGCrefRegs); |
3213 | printf(", InitByrefRegs=" ); |
3214 | printRegMaskInt(igPh->igPhData->igPhInitByrefRegs); |
3215 | emitDispRegSet(igPh->igPhData->igPhInitByrefRegs); |
3216 | printf("\n" ); |
3217 | |
3218 | assert(!(ig->igFlags & IGF_GC_VARS)); |
3219 | assert(!(ig->igFlags & IGF_BYREF_REGS)); |
3220 | } |
3221 | else |
3222 | { |
3223 | printf("offs=%06XH, size=%04XH" , ig->igOffs, ig->igSize); |
3224 | |
3225 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_GC_VARS) |
3226 | { |
3227 | printf(", gcVars=%s " , VarSetOps::ToString(emitComp, ig->igGCvars())); |
3228 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, ig->igGCvars()); |
3229 | } |
3230 | |
3231 | if (!(ig->igFlags & IGF_EMIT_ADD)) |
3232 | { |
3233 | printf(", gcrefRegs=" ); |
3234 | printRegMaskInt(ig->igGCregs); |
3235 | emitDispRegSet(ig->igGCregs); |
3236 | } |
3237 | |
3238 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_BYREF_REGS) |
3239 | { |
3240 | printf(", byrefRegs=" ); |
3241 | printRegMaskInt(ig->igByrefRegs()); |
3242 | emitDispRegSet(ig->igByrefRegs()); |
3243 | } |
3244 | |
3245 | emitDispIGflags(ig->igFlags); |
3246 | |
3247 | if (ig == emitCurIG) |
3248 | { |
3249 | printf(" <-- Current IG" ); |
3250 | } |
3251 | if (ig == emitPrologIG) |
3252 | { |
3253 | printf(" <-- Prolog IG" ); |
3254 | } |
3255 | printf("\n" ); |
3256 | |
3257 | if (verbose) |
3258 | { |
3259 | BYTE* ins = ig->igData; |
3260 | UNATIVE_OFFSET ofs = ig->igOffs; |
3261 | unsigned cnt = ig->igInsCnt; |
3262 | |
3263 | if (cnt) |
3264 | { |
3265 | printf("\n" ); |
3266 | |
3267 | do |
3268 | { |
3269 | instrDesc* id = (instrDesc*)ins; |
3270 | |
3271 | emitDispIns(id, false, true, false, ofs, nullptr, 0, ig); |
3272 | |
3273 | ins += emitSizeOfInsDsc(id); |
3274 | ofs += emitInstCodeSz(id); |
3275 | } while (--cnt); |
3276 | |
3277 | printf("\n" ); |
3278 | } |
3279 | } |
3280 | } |
3281 | } |
3282 | |
3283 | void emitter::emitDispIGlist(bool verbose) |
3284 | { |
3285 | insGroup* ig; |
3286 | insGroup* igPrev; |
3287 | |
3288 | for (igPrev = nullptr, ig = emitIGlist; ig; igPrev = ig, ig = ig->igNext) |
3289 | { |
3290 | emitDispIG(ig, igPrev, verbose); |
3291 | } |
3292 | } |
3293 | |
3294 | void emitter::emitDispGCinfo() |
3295 | { |
3296 | printf("Emitter GC tracking info:" ); |
3297 | printf("\n emitPrevGCrefVars " ); |
3298 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars); |
3299 | printf("\n emitPrevGCrefRegs(0x%p)=" , dspPtr(&emitPrevGCrefRegs)); |
3300 | printRegMaskInt(emitPrevGCrefRegs); |
3301 | emitDispRegSet(emitPrevGCrefRegs); |
3302 | printf("\n emitPrevByrefRegs(0x%p)=" , dspPtr(&emitPrevByrefRegs)); |
3303 | printRegMaskInt(emitPrevByrefRegs); |
3304 | emitDispRegSet(emitPrevByrefRegs); |
3305 | printf("\n emitInitGCrefVars " ); |
3306 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars); |
3307 | printf("\n emitInitGCrefRegs(0x%p)=" , dspPtr(&emitInitGCrefRegs)); |
3308 | printRegMaskInt(emitInitGCrefRegs); |
3309 | emitDispRegSet(emitInitGCrefRegs); |
3310 | printf("\n emitInitByrefRegs(0x%p)=" , dspPtr(&emitInitByrefRegs)); |
3311 | printRegMaskInt(emitInitByrefRegs); |
3312 | emitDispRegSet(emitInitByrefRegs); |
3313 | printf("\n emitThisGCrefVars " ); |
3314 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars); |
3315 | printf("\n emitThisGCrefRegs(0x%p)=" , dspPtr(&emitThisGCrefRegs)); |
3316 | printRegMaskInt(emitThisGCrefRegs); |
3317 | emitDispRegSet(emitThisGCrefRegs); |
3318 | printf("\n emitThisByrefRegs(0x%p)=" , dspPtr(&emitThisByrefRegs)); |
3319 | printRegMaskInt(emitThisByrefRegs); |
3320 | emitDispRegSet(emitThisByrefRegs); |
3321 | printf("\n\n" ); |
3322 | } |
3323 | |
3324 | #endif // DEBUG |
3325 | |
3326 | /***************************************************************************** |
3327 | * |
3328 | * Issue the given instruction. Basically, this is just a thin wrapper around |
3329 | * emitOutputInstr() that does a few debug checks. |
3330 | */ |
3331 | |
3332 | size_t emitter::emitIssue1Instr(insGroup* ig, instrDesc* id, BYTE** dp) |
3333 | { |
3334 | size_t is; |
3335 | |
3336 | /* Record the beginning offset of the instruction */ |
3337 | |
3338 | BYTE* curInsAdr = *dp; |
3339 | |
3340 | /* Issue the next instruction */ |
3341 | |
3342 | // printf("[S=%02u] " , emitCurStackLvl); |
3343 | |
3344 | is = emitOutputInstr(ig, id, dp); |
3345 | |
3346 | // printf("[S=%02u]\n", emitCurStackLvl); |
3347 | |
3348 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
3349 | |
3350 | /* |
3351 | If we're generating a full pointer map and the stack |
3352 | is empty, there better not be any "pending" argument |
3353 | push entries. |
3354 | */ |
3355 | |
3356 | assert(emitFullGCinfo == false || emitCurStackLvl != 0 || u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt == 0); |
3357 | |
3358 | #endif |
3359 | |
3360 | /* Did the size of the instruction match our expectations? */ |
3361 | |
3362 | UNATIVE_OFFSET csz = (UNATIVE_OFFSET)(*dp - curInsAdr); |
3363 | |
3364 | if (csz != id->idCodeSize()) |
3365 | { |
3366 | /* It is fatal to under-estimate the instruction size */ |
3367 | noway_assert(emitInstCodeSz(id) >= csz); |
3368 | |
3369 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
3370 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
3371 | { |
3372 | printf("Instruction predicted size = %u, actual = %u\n" , emitInstCodeSz(id), csz); |
3373 | } |
3374 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
3375 | |
3376 | /* The instruction size estimate wasn't accurate; remember this */ |
3377 | |
3378 | ig->igFlags |= IGF_UPD_ISZ; |
3379 | #if defined(_TARGET_XARCH_) |
3380 | id->idCodeSize(csz); |
3381 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3382 | // This is done as part of emitSetShortJump(); |
3383 | // insSize isz = emitInsSize(id->idInsFmt()); |
3384 | // id->idInsSize(isz); |
3385 | #else |
3386 | /* It is fatal to over-estimate the instruction size */ |
3387 | IMPL_LIMITATION("Over-estimated instruction size" ); |
3388 | #endif |
3389 | } |
3390 | |
3391 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3392 | /* Make sure the instruction descriptor size also matches our expectations */ |
3393 | if (is != emitSizeOfInsDsc(id)) |
3394 | { |
3395 | printf("%s at %u: Expected size = %u , actual size = %u\n" , emitIfName(id->idInsFmt()), |
3396 | id->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum, is, emitSizeOfInsDsc(id)); |
3397 | assert(is == emitSizeOfInsDsc(id)); |
3398 | } |
3399 | #endif |
3400 | |
3401 | return is; |
3402 | } |
3403 | |
3404 | /***************************************************************************** |
3405 | * |
3406 | * Update the offsets of all the instruction groups (note: please don't be |
3407 | * lazy and call this routine frequently, it walks the list of instruction |
3408 | * groups and thus it isn't cheap). |
3409 | */ |
3410 | |
3411 | void emitter::emitRecomputeIGoffsets() |
3412 | { |
3413 | UNATIVE_OFFSET offs; |
3414 | insGroup* ig; |
3415 | |
3416 | for (ig = emitIGlist, offs = 0; ig; ig = ig->igNext) |
3417 | { |
3418 | ig->igOffs = offs; |
3419 | assert(IsCodeAligned(ig->igOffs)); |
3420 | offs += ig->igSize; |
3421 | } |
3422 | |
3423 | /* Set the total code size */ |
3424 | |
3425 | emitTotalCodeSize = offs; |
3426 | |
3427 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3428 | emitCheckIGoffsets(); |
3429 | #endif |
3430 | } |
3431 | |
3432 | /***************************************************************************** |
3433 | * Bind targets of relative jumps to choose the smallest possible encoding. |
3434 | * X86 and AMD64 have a small and large encoding. |
3435 | * ARM has a small, medium, and large encoding. The large encoding is a pseudo-op |
3436 | * to handle greater range than the conditional branch instructions can handle. |
3437 | * ARM64 has a small and large encoding for both conditional branch and loading label addresses. |
3438 | * The large encodings are pseudo-ops that represent a multiple instruction sequence, similar to ARM. (Currently |
3439 | * NYI). |
3440 | */ |
3441 | |
3442 | void emitter::emitJumpDistBind() |
3443 | { |
3444 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3445 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
3446 | { |
3447 | printf("*************** In emitJumpDistBind()\n" ); |
3448 | } |
3449 | if (EMIT_INSTLIST_VERBOSE) |
3450 | { |
3451 | printf("\nInstruction list before jump distance binding:\n\n" ); |
3452 | emitDispIGlist(true); |
3453 | } |
3454 | #endif |
3455 | |
3456 | instrDescJmp* jmp; |
3457 | |
3458 | UNATIVE_OFFSET ; // The smallest offset greater than that required for a jump to be converted |
3459 | // to a small jump. If it is small enough, we will iterate in hopes of |
3460 | // converting those jumps we missed converting the first (or second...) time. |
3461 | |
3462 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3463 | UNATIVE_OFFSET minMediumExtra; // Same as 'minShortExtra', but for medium-sized jumps. |
3464 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
3465 | |
3466 | UNATIVE_OFFSET adjIG; |
3467 | UNATIVE_OFFSET adjLJ; |
3468 | insGroup* lstIG; |
3469 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3470 | insGroup* prologIG = emitPrologIG; |
3471 | #endif // DEBUG |
3472 | |
3473 | int jmp_iteration = 1; |
3474 | |
3475 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
3476 | /* If we iterate to look for more jumps to shorten, we start again here. */ |
3477 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
3478 | |
3479 | AGAIN: |
3480 | |
3481 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3482 | emitCheckIGoffsets(); |
3483 | #endif |
3484 | |
3485 | /* |
3486 | In the following loop we convert all jump targets from "BasicBlock *" |
3487 | to "insGroup *" values. We also estimate which jumps will be short. |
3488 | */ |
3489 | |
3490 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3491 | insGroup* lastIG = nullptr; |
3492 | instrDescJmp* lastLJ = nullptr; |
3493 | #endif |
3494 | |
3495 | lstIG = nullptr; |
3496 | adjLJ = 0; |
3497 | adjIG = 0; |
3498 | minShortExtra = (UNATIVE_OFFSET)-1; |
3499 | |
3500 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3501 | minMediumExtra = (UNATIVE_OFFSET)-1; |
3502 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
3503 | |
3504 | for (jmp = emitJumpList; jmp; jmp = jmp->idjNext) |
3505 | { |
3506 | insGroup* jmpIG; |
3507 | insGroup* tgtIG; |
3508 | |
3509 | UNATIVE_OFFSET jsz; // size of the jump instruction in bytes |
3510 | |
3511 | UNATIVE_OFFSET ssz = 0; // small jump size |
3512 | NATIVE_OFFSET nsd = 0; // small jump max. neg distance |
3513 | NATIVE_OFFSET psd = 0; // small jump max. pos distance |
3514 | |
3515 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3516 | UNATIVE_OFFSET msz = 0; // medium jump size |
3517 | NATIVE_OFFSET nmd = 0; // medium jump max. neg distance |
3518 | NATIVE_OFFSET pmd = 0; // medium jump max. pos distance |
3519 | NATIVE_OFFSET mextra; // How far beyond the medium jump range is this jump offset? |
3520 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
3521 | |
3522 | NATIVE_OFFSET ; // How far beyond the short jump range is this jump offset? |
3523 | UNATIVE_OFFSET srcInstrOffs; // offset of the source instruction of the jump |
3524 | UNATIVE_OFFSET srcEncodingOffs; // offset of the source used by the instruction set to calculate the relative |
3525 | // offset of the jump |
3526 | UNATIVE_OFFSET dstOffs; |
3527 | NATIVE_OFFSET jmpDist; // the relative jump distance, as it will be encoded |
3528 | UNATIVE_OFFSET oldSize; |
3529 | UNATIVE_OFFSET sizeDif; |
3530 | |
3531 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
3532 | assert(jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_LABEL || jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_RWR_LABEL || jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_SWR_LABEL); |
3533 | |
3534 | /* Figure out the smallest size we can end up with */ |
3535 | |
3536 | if (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_LABEL) |
3537 | { |
3538 | if (emitIsCondJump(jmp)) |
3539 | { |
3540 | ssz = JCC_SIZE_SMALL; |
3541 | nsd = JCC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3542 | psd = JCC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3543 | } |
3544 | else |
3545 | { |
3546 | ssz = JMP_SIZE_SMALL; |
3547 | nsd = JMP_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3548 | psd = JMP_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3549 | } |
3550 | } |
3551 | #endif // _TARGET_XARCH_ |
3552 | |
3553 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
3554 | assert((jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T2_J1) || (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T2_J2) || (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T1_I) || |
3555 | (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T1_K) || (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T1_M) || (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T2_M1) || |
3556 | (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T2_N1) || (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_T1_J3) || (jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_LARGEJMP)); |
3557 | |
3558 | /* Figure out the smallest size we can end up with */ |
3559 | |
3560 | if (emitIsCondJump(jmp)) |
3561 | { |
3562 | ssz = JCC_SIZE_SMALL; |
3563 | nsd = JCC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3564 | psd = JCC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3565 | |
3566 | msz = JCC_SIZE_MEDIUM; |
3567 | nmd = JCC_DIST_MEDIUM_MAX_NEG; |
3568 | pmd = JCC_DIST_MEDIUM_MAX_POS; |
3569 | } |
3570 | else if (emitIsCmpJump(jmp)) |
3571 | { |
3572 | ssz = JMP_SIZE_SMALL; |
3573 | nsd = 0; |
3574 | psd = 126; |
3575 | } |
3576 | else if (emitIsUncondJump(jmp)) |
3577 | { |
3578 | ssz = JMP_SIZE_SMALL; |
3579 | nsd = JMP_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3580 | psd = JMP_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3581 | } |
3582 | else if (emitIsLoadLabel(jmp)) |
3583 | { |
3584 | ssz = LBL_SIZE_SMALL; |
3585 | nsd = LBL_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3586 | psd = LBL_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3587 | } |
3588 | else |
3589 | { |
3590 | assert(!"Unknown jump instruction" ); |
3591 | } |
3592 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
3593 | |
3594 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM64_ |
3595 | /* Figure out the smallest size we can end up with */ |
3596 | |
3597 | if (emitIsCondJump(jmp)) |
3598 | { |
3599 | ssz = JCC_SIZE_SMALL; |
3600 | bool isTest = (jmp->idIns() == INS_tbz) || (jmp->idIns() == INS_tbnz); |
3601 | |
3602 | nsd = (isTest) ? TB_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG : JCC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3603 | psd = (isTest) ? TB_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS : JCC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3604 | } |
3605 | else if (emitIsUncondJump(jmp)) |
3606 | { |
3607 | // Nothing to do; we don't shrink these. |
3608 | assert(jmp->idjShort); |
3609 | ssz = JMP_SIZE_SMALL; |
3610 | } |
3611 | else if (emitIsLoadLabel(jmp)) |
3612 | { |
3613 | ssz = LBL_SIZE_SMALL; |
3614 | nsd = LBL_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3615 | psd = LBL_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3616 | } |
3617 | else if (emitIsLoadConstant(jmp)) |
3618 | { |
3619 | ssz = LDC_SIZE_SMALL; |
3620 | nsd = LDC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_NEG; |
3621 | psd = LDC_DIST_SMALL_MAX_POS; |
3622 | } |
3623 | else |
3624 | { |
3625 | assert(!"Unknown jump instruction" ); |
3626 | } |
3627 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM64_ |
3628 | |
3629 | /* Make sure the jumps are properly ordered */ |
3630 | |
3631 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3632 | assert(lastLJ == nullptr || lastIG != jmp->idjIG || lastLJ->idjOffs < jmp->idjOffs); |
3633 | lastLJ = (lastIG == jmp->idjIG) ? jmp : nullptr; |
3634 | |
3635 | assert(lastIG == nullptr || lastIG->igNum <= jmp->idjIG->igNum || jmp->idjIG == prologIG || |
3636 | emitNxtIGnum > unsigned(0xFFFF)); // igNum might overflow |
3637 | lastIG = jmp->idjIG; |
3638 | #endif // DEBUG |
3639 | |
3640 | /* Get hold of the current jump size */ |
3641 | |
3642 | jsz = emitSizeOfJump(jmp); |
3643 | |
3644 | /* Get the group the jump is in */ |
3645 | |
3646 | jmpIG = jmp->idjIG; |
3647 | |
3648 | /* Are we in a group different from the previous jump? */ |
3649 | |
3650 | if (lstIG != jmpIG) |
3651 | { |
3652 | /* Were there any jumps before this one? */ |
3653 | |
3654 | if (lstIG) |
3655 | { |
3656 | /* Adjust the offsets of the intervening blocks */ |
3657 | |
3658 | do |
3659 | { |
3660 | lstIG = lstIG->igNext; |
3661 | assert(lstIG); |
3662 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3663 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
3664 | { |
3665 | printf("Adjusted offset of " FMT_BB " from %04X to %04X\n" , lstIG->igNum, lstIG->igOffs, |
3666 | lstIG->igOffs - adjIG); |
3667 | } |
3668 | #endif // DEBUG |
3669 | lstIG->igOffs -= adjIG; |
3670 | assert(IsCodeAligned(lstIG->igOffs)); |
3671 | } while (lstIG != jmpIG); |
3672 | } |
3673 | |
3674 | /* We've got the first jump in a new group */ |
3675 | |
3676 | adjLJ = 0; |
3677 | lstIG = jmpIG; |
3678 | } |
3679 | |
3680 | /* Apply any local size adjustment to the jump's relative offset */ |
3681 | |
3682 | jmp->idjOffs -= adjLJ; |
3683 | |
3684 | // If this is a jump via register, the instruction size does not change, so we are done. |
3685 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
3686 | |
3687 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
3688 | // JIT code and data will be allocated together for arm64 so the relative offset to JIT data is known. |
3689 | // In case such offset can be encodeable for `ldr` (+-1MB), shorten it. |
3690 | if (jmp->idAddr()->iiaIsJitDataOffset()) |
3691 | { |
3692 | // Reference to JIT data |
3693 | assert(jmp->idIsBound()); |
3694 | UNATIVE_OFFSET srcOffs = jmpIG->igOffs + jmp->idjOffs; |
3695 | |
3696 | int doff = jmp->idAddr()->iiaGetJitDataOffset(); |
3697 | assert(doff >= 0); |
3698 | ssize_t imm = emitGetInsSC(jmp); |
3699 | assert((imm >= 0) && (imm < 0x1000)); // 0x1000 is arbitrary, currently 'imm' is always 0 |
3700 | |
3701 | unsigned dataOffs = (unsigned)(doff + imm); |
3702 | assert(dataOffs < emitDataSize()); |
3703 | |
3704 | // Conservately assume JIT data starts after the entire code size. |
3705 | // TODO-ARM64: we might consider only hot code size which will be computed later in emitComputeCodeSizes(). |
3706 | assert(emitTotalCodeSize > 0); |
3707 | UNATIVE_OFFSET maxDstOffs = emitTotalCodeSize + dataOffs; |
3708 | |
3709 | // Check if the distance is within the encoding length. |
3710 | jmpDist = maxDstOffs - srcOffs; |
3711 | extra = jmpDist - psd; |
3712 | if (extra <= 0) |
3713 | { |
3714 | goto SHORT_JMP; |
3715 | } |
3716 | |
3717 | // Keep the large form. |
3718 | continue; |
3719 | } |
3720 | #endif |
3721 | |
3722 | /* Have we bound this jump's target already? */ |
3723 | |
3724 | if (jmp->idIsBound()) |
3725 | { |
3726 | /* Does the jump already have the smallest size? */ |
3727 | |
3728 | if (jmp->idjShort) |
3729 | { |
3730 | assert(emitSizeOfJump(jmp) == ssz); |
3731 | |
3732 | // We should not be jumping/branching across funclets/functions |
3733 | emitCheckFuncletBranch(jmp, jmpIG); |
3734 | |
3735 | continue; |
3736 | } |
3737 | |
3738 | tgtIG = jmp->idAddr()->iiaIGlabel; |
3739 | } |
3740 | else |
3741 | { |
3742 | /* First time we've seen this label, convert its target */ |
3743 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
3744 | |
3745 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3746 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
3747 | { |
3748 | printf("Binding: " ); |
3749 | emitDispIns(jmp, false, false, false); |
3750 | printf("Binding L_M%03u_" FMT_BB, Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, jmp->idAddr()->iiaBBlabel->bbNum); |
3751 | } |
3752 | #endif // DEBUG |
3753 | |
3754 | tgtIG = (insGroup*)emitCodeGetCookie(jmp->idAddr()->iiaBBlabel); |
3755 | |
3756 | #ifdef DEBUG |
3757 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
3758 | { |
3759 | if (tgtIG) |
3760 | { |
3761 | printf("to G_M%03u_IG%02u\n" , Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, tgtIG->igNum); |
3762 | } |
3763 | else |
3764 | { |
3765 | printf("-- ERROR, no emitter cookie for " FMT_BB "; it is probably missing BBF_JMP_TARGET or " |
3766 | "BBF_HAS_LABEL.\n" , |
3767 | jmp->idAddr()->iiaBBlabel->bbNum); |
3768 | } |
3769 | } |
3770 | assert(tgtIG); |
3771 | #endif // DEBUG |
3772 | |
3773 | /* Record the bound target */ |
3774 | |
3775 | jmp->idAddr()->iiaIGlabel = tgtIG; |
3776 | jmp->idSetIsBound(); |
3777 | } |
3778 | |
3779 | // We should not be jumping/branching across funclets/functions |
3780 | emitCheckFuncletBranch(jmp, jmpIG); |
3781 | |
3782 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
3783 | /* Done if this is not a variable-sized jump */ |
3784 | |
3785 | if ((jmp->idIns() == INS_push) || (jmp->idIns() == INS_mov) || (jmp->idIns() == INS_call) || |
3786 | (jmp->idIns() == INS_push_hide)) |
3787 | { |
3788 | continue; |
3789 | } |
3790 | #endif |
3791 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
3792 | if ((jmp->idIns() == INS_push) || (jmp->idIns() == INS_mov) || (jmp->idIns() == INS_movt) || |
3793 | (jmp->idIns() == INS_movw)) |
3794 | { |
3795 | continue; |
3796 | } |
3797 | #endif |
3798 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM64_ |
3799 | // There is only one size of unconditional branch; we don't support functions larger than 2^28 bytes (our branch |
3800 | // range). |
3801 | if (emitIsUncondJump(jmp)) |
3802 | { |
3803 | continue; |
3804 | } |
3805 | #endif |
3806 | |
3807 | /* |
3808 | In the following distance calculations, if we're not actually |
3809 | scheduling the code (i.e. reordering instructions), we can |
3810 | use the actual offset of the jump (rather than the beg/end of |
3811 | the instruction group) since the jump will not be moved around |
3812 | and thus its offset is accurate. |
3813 | |
3814 | First we need to figure out whether this jump is a forward or |
3815 | backward one; to do this we simply look at the ordinals of the |
3816 | group that contains the jump and the target. |
3817 | */ |
3818 | |
3819 | srcInstrOffs = jmpIG->igOffs + jmp->idjOffs; |
3820 | |
3821 | /* Note that the destination is always the beginning of an IG, so no need for an offset inside it */ |
3822 | dstOffs = tgtIG->igOffs; |
3823 | |
3824 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3825 | srcEncodingOffs = |
3826 | srcInstrOffs + 4; // For relative branches, ARM PC is always considered to be the instruction address + 4 |
3827 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
3828 | srcEncodingOffs = |
3829 | srcInstrOffs; // For relative branches, ARM64 PC is always considered to be the instruction address |
3830 | #else |
3831 | srcEncodingOffs = srcInstrOffs + ssz; // Encoding offset of relative offset for small branch |
3832 | #endif |
3833 | |
3834 | if (jmpIG->igNum < tgtIG->igNum) |
3835 | { |
3836 | /* Forward jump */ |
3837 | |
3838 | /* Adjust the target offset by the current delta. This is a worst-case estimate, as jumps between |
3839 | here and the target could be shortened, causing the actual distance to shrink. |
3840 | */ |
3841 | |
3842 | dstOffs -= adjIG; |
3843 | |
3844 | /* Compute the distance estimate */ |
3845 | |
3846 | jmpDist = dstOffs - srcEncodingOffs; |
3847 | |
3848 | /* How much beyond the max. short distance does the jump go? */ |
3849 | |
3850 | extra = jmpDist - psd; |
3851 | |
3852 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
3853 | assert(jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo() != nullptr); |
3854 | if (jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum == (unsigned)INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM || INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3855 | { |
3856 | if (INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3857 | { |
3858 | printf("[1] Jump %u:\n" , jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum); |
3859 | } |
3860 | printf("[1] Jump block is at %08X\n" , jmpIG->igOffs); |
3861 | printf("[1] Jump reloffset is %04X\n" , jmp->idjOffs); |
3862 | printf("[1] Jump source is at %08X\n" , srcEncodingOffs); |
3863 | printf("[1] Label block is at %08X\n" , dstOffs); |
3864 | printf("[1] Jump dist. is %04X\n" , jmpDist); |
3865 | if (extra > 0) |
3866 | { |
3867 | printf("[1] Dist excess [S] = %d \n" , extra); |
3868 | } |
3869 | } |
3870 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
3871 | { |
3872 | printf("Estimate of fwd jump [%08X/%03u]: %04X -> %04X = %04X\n" , dspPtr(jmp), |
3873 | jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum, srcInstrOffs, dstOffs, jmpDist); |
3874 | } |
3875 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
3876 | |
3877 | if (extra <= 0) |
3878 | { |
3879 | /* This jump will be a short one */ |
3880 | goto SHORT_JMP; |
3881 | } |
3882 | } |
3883 | else |
3884 | { |
3885 | /* Backward jump */ |
3886 | |
3887 | /* Compute the distance estimate */ |
3888 | |
3889 | jmpDist = srcEncodingOffs - dstOffs; |
3890 | |
3891 | /* How much beyond the max. short distance does the jump go? */ |
3892 | |
3893 | extra = jmpDist + nsd; |
3894 | |
3895 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
3896 | assert(jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo() != nullptr); |
3897 | if (jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum == (unsigned)INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM || INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3898 | { |
3899 | if (INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3900 | { |
3901 | printf("[2] Jump %u:\n" , jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum); |
3902 | } |
3903 | printf("[2] Jump block is at %08X\n" , jmpIG->igOffs); |
3904 | printf("[2] Jump reloffset is %04X\n" , jmp->idjOffs); |
3905 | printf("[2] Jump source is at %08X\n" , srcEncodingOffs); |
3906 | printf("[2] Label block is at %08X\n" , dstOffs); |
3907 | printf("[2] Jump dist. is %04X\n" , jmpDist); |
3908 | if (extra > 0) |
3909 | { |
3910 | printf("[2] Dist excess [S] = %d \n" , extra); |
3911 | } |
3912 | } |
3913 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
3914 | { |
3915 | printf("Estimate of bwd jump [%08X/%03u]: %04X -> %04X = %04X\n" , dspPtr(jmp), |
3916 | jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum, srcInstrOffs, dstOffs, jmpDist); |
3917 | } |
3918 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
3919 | |
3920 | if (extra <= 0) |
3921 | { |
3922 | /* This jump will be a short one */ |
3923 | goto SHORT_JMP; |
3924 | } |
3925 | } |
3926 | |
3927 | /* We arrive here if the jump couldn't be made short, at least for now */ |
3928 | |
3929 | /* We had better not have eagerly marked the jump as short |
3930 | * in emitIns_J(). If we did, then it has to be able to stay short |
3931 | * as emitIns_J() uses the worst case scenario, and blocks can |
3932 | * only move closer together after that. |
3933 | */ |
3934 | assert(jmp->idjShort == 0); |
3935 | |
3936 | /* Keep track of the closest distance we got */ |
3937 | |
3938 | if (minShortExtra > (unsigned)extra) |
3939 | { |
3940 | minShortExtra = (unsigned)extra; |
3941 | } |
3942 | |
3943 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
3944 | |
3945 | // If we're here, we couldn't convert to a small jump. |
3946 | // Handle conversion to medium-sized conditional jumps. |
3947 | // 'srcInstrOffs', 'srcEncodingOffs', 'dstOffs', 'jmpDist' have already been computed |
3948 | // and don't need to be recomputed. |
3949 | |
3950 | if (emitIsCondJump(jmp)) |
3951 | { |
3952 | if (jmpIG->igNum < tgtIG->igNum) |
3953 | { |
3954 | /* Forward jump */ |
3955 | |
3956 | /* How much beyond the max. medium distance does the jump go? */ |
3957 | |
3958 | mextra = jmpDist - pmd; |
3959 | |
3960 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
3961 | assert(jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo() != NULL); |
3962 | if (jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum == (unsigned)INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM || INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3963 | { |
3964 | if (mextra > 0) |
3965 | { |
3966 | if (INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3967 | printf("[6] Jump %u:\n" , jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum); |
3968 | printf("[6] Dist excess [S] = %d \n" , mextra); |
3969 | } |
3970 | } |
3971 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
3972 | |
3973 | if (mextra <= 0) |
3974 | { |
3975 | /* This jump will be a medium one */ |
3976 | goto MEDIUM_JMP; |
3977 | } |
3978 | } |
3979 | else |
3980 | { |
3981 | /* Backward jump */ |
3982 | |
3983 | /* How much beyond the max. medium distance does the jump go? */ |
3984 | |
3985 | mextra = jmpDist + nmd; |
3986 | |
3987 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
3988 | assert(jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo() != NULL); |
3989 | if (jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum == (unsigned)INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM || INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3990 | { |
3991 | if (mextra > 0) |
3992 | { |
3993 | if (INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
3994 | printf("[7] Jump %u:\n" , jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum); |
3995 | printf("[7] Dist excess [S] = %d \n" , mextra); |
3996 | } |
3997 | } |
3998 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
3999 | |
4000 | if (mextra <= 0) |
4001 | { |
4002 | /* This jump will be a medium one */ |
4003 | goto MEDIUM_JMP; |
4004 | } |
4005 | } |
4006 | |
4007 | /* We arrive here if the jump couldn't be made medium, at least for now */ |
4008 | |
4009 | /* Keep track of the closest distance we got */ |
4010 | |
4011 | if (minMediumExtra > (unsigned)mextra) |
4012 | minMediumExtra = (unsigned)mextra; |
4013 | } |
4014 | |
4015 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
4016 | |
4017 | /***************************************************************************** |
4018 | * We arrive here if the jump must stay long, at least for now. |
4019 | * Go try the next one. |
4020 | */ |
4021 | |
4022 | continue; |
4023 | |
4024 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
4025 | /* Handle conversion to short jump */ |
4026 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
4027 | |
4028 | SHORT_JMP: |
4029 | |
4030 | /* Try to make this jump a short one */ |
4031 | |
4032 | emitSetShortJump(jmp); |
4033 | |
4034 | if (!jmp->idjShort) |
4035 | { |
4036 | continue; // This jump must be kept long |
4037 | } |
4038 | |
4039 | /* This jump is becoming either short or medium */ |
4040 | |
4041 | oldSize = jsz; |
4042 | jsz = ssz; |
4043 | assert(oldSize >= jsz); |
4044 | sizeDif = oldSize - jsz; |
4045 | |
4046 | #if defined(_TARGET_XARCH_) |
4047 | jmp->idCodeSize(jsz); |
4048 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
4049 | #if 0 |
4050 | // This is done as part of emitSetShortJump(): |
4051 | insSize isz = emitInsSize(jmp->idInsFmt()); |
4052 | jmp->idInsSize(isz); |
4053 | #endif |
4054 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
4055 | // The size of IF_LARGEJMP/IF_LARGEADR/IF_LARGELDC are 8 or 12. |
4056 | // All other code size is 4. |
4057 | assert((sizeDif == 4) || (sizeDif == 8)); |
4058 | #else |
4059 | #error Unsupported or unset target architecture |
4060 | #endif |
4061 | |
4062 | goto NEXT_JMP; |
4063 | |
4064 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
4065 | |
4066 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
4067 | /* Handle conversion to medium jump */ |
4068 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
4069 | |
4070 | MEDIUM_JMP: |
4071 | |
4072 | /* Try to make this jump a medium one */ |
4073 | |
4074 | emitSetMediumJump(jmp); |
4075 | |
4076 | if (jmp->idCodeSize() > msz) |
4077 | { |
4078 | continue; // This jump wasn't shortened |
4079 | } |
4080 | assert(jmp->idCodeSize() == msz); |
4081 | |
4082 | /* This jump is becoming medium */ |
4083 | |
4084 | oldSize = jsz; |
4085 | jsz = msz; |
4086 | assert(oldSize >= jsz); |
4087 | sizeDif = oldSize - jsz; |
4088 | |
4089 | goto NEXT_JMP; |
4090 | |
4091 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
4092 | |
4093 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
4094 | |
4095 | NEXT_JMP: |
4096 | |
4097 | /* Make sure the size of the jump is marked correctly */ |
4098 | |
4099 | assert((0 == (jsz | jmpDist)) || (jsz == emitSizeOfJump(jmp))); |
4100 | |
4101 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4102 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
4103 | { |
4104 | printf("Shrinking jump [%08X/%03u]\n" , dspPtr(jmp), jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum); |
4105 | } |
4106 | #endif |
4107 | noway_assert((unsigned short)sizeDif == sizeDif); |
4108 | |
4109 | adjIG += sizeDif; |
4110 | adjLJ += sizeDif; |
4111 | jmpIG->igSize -= (unsigned short)sizeDif; |
4112 | emitTotalCodeSize -= sizeDif; |
4113 | |
4114 | /* The jump size estimate wasn't accurate; flag its group */ |
4115 | |
4116 | jmpIG->igFlags |= IGF_UPD_ISZ; |
4117 | |
4118 | } // end for each jump |
4119 | |
4120 | /* Did we shorten any jumps? */ |
4121 | |
4122 | if (adjIG) |
4123 | { |
4124 | /* Adjust offsets of any remaining blocks */ |
4125 | |
4126 | assert(lstIG); |
4127 | |
4128 | for (;;) |
4129 | { |
4130 | lstIG = lstIG->igNext; |
4131 | if (!lstIG) |
4132 | { |
4133 | break; |
4134 | } |
4135 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4136 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
4137 | { |
4138 | printf("Adjusted offset of " FMT_BB " from %04X to %04X\n" , lstIG->igNum, lstIG->igOffs, |
4139 | lstIG->igOffs - adjIG); |
4140 | } |
4141 | #endif // DEBUG |
4142 | lstIG->igOffs -= adjIG; |
4143 | assert(IsCodeAligned(lstIG->igOffs)); |
4144 | } |
4145 | |
4146 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4147 | emitCheckIGoffsets(); |
4148 | #endif |
4149 | |
4150 | /* Is there a chance of other jumps becoming short? */ |
4151 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
4152 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4153 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
4154 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
4155 | printf("Total shrinkage = %3u, min extra short jump size = %3u, min extra medium jump size = %u\n" , adjIG, |
4156 | minShortExtra, minMediumExtra); |
4157 | #else |
4158 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
4159 | { |
4160 | printf("Total shrinkage = %3u, min extra jump size = %3u\n" , adjIG, minShortExtra); |
4161 | } |
4162 | #endif |
4163 | #endif |
4164 | |
4165 | if ((minShortExtra <= adjIG) |
4166 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
4167 | || (minMediumExtra <= adjIG) |
4168 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
4169 | ) |
4170 | { |
4171 | jmp_iteration++; |
4172 | |
4173 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4174 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
4175 | { |
4176 | printf("Iterating branch shortening. Iteration = %d\n" , jmp_iteration); |
4177 | } |
4178 | #endif |
4179 | |
4180 | goto AGAIN; |
4181 | } |
4182 | } |
4183 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4184 | if (EMIT_INSTLIST_VERBOSE) |
4185 | { |
4186 | printf("\nLabels list after the jump dist binding:\n\n" ); |
4187 | emitDispIGlist(false); |
4188 | } |
4189 | |
4190 | emitCheckIGoffsets(); |
4191 | #endif // DEBUG |
4192 | } |
4193 | |
4194 | void emitter::emitCheckFuncletBranch(instrDesc* jmp, insGroup* jmpIG) |
4195 | { |
4196 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4197 | // We should not be jumping/branching across funclets/functions |
4198 | // Except possibly a 'call' to a finally funclet for a local unwind |
4199 | // or a 'return' from a catch handler (that can go just about anywhere) |
4200 | // This routine attempts to validate that any branches across funclets |
4201 | // meets one of those criteria... |
4202 | assert(jmp->idIsBound()); |
4203 | |
4204 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
4205 | // An lea of a code address (for constant data stored with the code) |
4206 | // is treated like a jump for emission purposes but is not really a jump so |
4207 | // we don't have to check anything here. |
4208 | if (jmp->idIns() == INS_lea) |
4209 | { |
4210 | return; |
4211 | } |
4212 | #endif |
4213 | |
4214 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARMARCH_ |
4215 | if (jmp->idAddr()->iiaHasInstrCount()) |
4216 | { |
4217 | // Too hard to figure out funclets from just an instruction count |
4218 | // You're on your own! |
4219 | return; |
4220 | } |
4221 | #endif // _TARGET_ARMARCH_ |
4222 | |
4223 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM64_ |
4224 | // No interest if it's not jmp. |
4225 | if (emitIsLoadLabel(jmp) || emitIsLoadConstant(jmp)) |
4226 | { |
4227 | return; |
4228 | } |
4229 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM64_ |
4230 | |
4231 | insGroup* tgtIG = jmp->idAddr()->iiaIGlabel; |
4232 | assert(tgtIG); |
4233 | if (tgtIG->igFuncIdx != jmpIG->igFuncIdx) |
4234 | { |
4235 | if (jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idFinallyCall) |
4236 | { |
4237 | // We don't record enough information to determine this accurately, so instead |
4238 | // we assume that any branch to the very start of a finally is OK. |
4239 | |
4240 | // No branches back to the root method |
4241 | assert(tgtIG->igFuncIdx > 0); |
4242 | FuncInfoDsc* tgtFunc = emitComp->funGetFunc(tgtIG->igFuncIdx); |
4243 | assert(tgtFunc->funKind == FUNC_HANDLER); |
4244 | EHblkDsc* tgtEH = emitComp->ehGetDsc(tgtFunc->funEHIndex); |
4245 | |
4246 | // Only branches to finallys (not faults, catches, filters, etc.) |
4247 | assert(tgtEH->HasFinallyHandler()); |
4248 | |
4249 | // Only to the first block of the finally (which is properly marked) |
4250 | BasicBlock* tgtBlk = tgtEH->ebdHndBeg; |
4251 | assert(tgtBlk->bbFlags & BBF_FUNCLET_BEG); |
4252 | |
4253 | // And now we made it back to where we started |
4254 | assert(tgtIG == emitCodeGetCookie(tgtBlk)); |
4255 | assert(tgtIG->igFuncIdx == emitComp->funGetFuncIdx(tgtBlk)); |
4256 | } |
4257 | else if (jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idCatchRet) |
4258 | { |
4259 | // Again there isn't enough information to prove this correct |
4260 | // so just allow a 'branch' to any other 'parent' funclet |
4261 | |
4262 | FuncInfoDsc* jmpFunc = emitComp->funGetFunc(jmpIG->igFuncIdx); |
4263 | assert(jmpFunc->funKind == FUNC_HANDLER); |
4264 | EHblkDsc* jmpEH = emitComp->ehGetDsc(jmpFunc->funEHIndex); |
4265 | |
4266 | // Only branches out of catches |
4267 | assert(jmpEH->HasCatchHandler()); |
4268 | |
4269 | FuncInfoDsc* tgtFunc = emitComp->funGetFunc(tgtIG->igFuncIdx); |
4270 | assert(tgtFunc); |
4271 | if (tgtFunc->funKind == FUNC_HANDLER) |
4272 | { |
4273 | // An outward chain to the containing funclet/EH handler |
4274 | // Note that it might be anywhere within nested try bodies |
4275 | assert(jmpEH->ebdEnclosingHndIndex == tgtFunc->funEHIndex); |
4276 | } |
4277 | else |
4278 | { |
4279 | // This funclet is 'top level' and so it is branching back to the |
4280 | // root function, and should have no containing EH handlers |
4281 | // but it could be nested within try bodies... |
4282 | assert(tgtFunc->funKind == FUNC_ROOT); |
4283 | assert(jmpEH->ebdEnclosingHndIndex == EHblkDsc::NO_ENCLOSING_INDEX); |
4284 | } |
4285 | } |
4286 | else |
4287 | { |
4288 | printf("Hit an illegal branch between funclets!" ); |
4289 | assert(tgtIG->igFuncIdx == jmpIG->igFuncIdx); |
4290 | } |
4291 | } |
4292 | #endif // DEBUG |
4293 | } |
4294 | |
4295 | /***************************************************************************** |
4296 | * |
4297 | * Compute the code sizes that we're going to use to allocate the code buffers. |
4298 | * |
4299 | * This sets: |
4300 | * |
4301 | * emitTotalHotCodeSize |
4302 | * emitTotalColdCodeSize |
4303 | * Compiler::info.compTotalHotCodeSize |
4304 | * Compiler::info.compTotalColdCodeSize |
4305 | */ |
4306 | |
4307 | void emitter::emitComputeCodeSizes() |
4308 | { |
4309 | assert((emitComp->fgFirstColdBlock == nullptr) == (emitFirstColdIG == nullptr)); |
4310 | |
4311 | if (emitFirstColdIG) |
4312 | { |
4313 | emitTotalHotCodeSize = emitFirstColdIG->igOffs; |
4314 | emitTotalColdCodeSize = emitTotalCodeSize - emitTotalHotCodeSize; |
4315 | } |
4316 | else |
4317 | { |
4318 | emitTotalHotCodeSize = emitTotalCodeSize; |
4319 | emitTotalColdCodeSize = 0; |
4320 | } |
4321 | |
4322 | emitComp->info.compTotalHotCodeSize = emitTotalHotCodeSize; |
4323 | emitComp->info.compTotalColdCodeSize = emitTotalColdCodeSize; |
4324 | |
4325 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4326 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
4327 | { |
4328 | printf("\nHot code size = 0x%X bytes\n" , emitTotalHotCodeSize); |
4329 | printf("Cold code size = 0x%X bytes\n" , emitTotalColdCodeSize); |
4330 | } |
4331 | #endif |
4332 | } |
4333 | |
4334 | /***************************************************************************** |
4335 | * |
4336 | * Called at the end of code generation, this method creates the code, data |
4337 | * and GC info blocks for the method. Returns the size of the method (which must fit in an unsigned). |
4338 | */ |
4339 | |
4340 | unsigned emitter::emitEndCodeGen(Compiler* comp, |
4341 | bool contTrkPtrLcls, |
4342 | bool fullyInt, |
4343 | bool fullPtrMap, |
4344 | bool returnsGCr, |
4345 | unsigned xcptnsCount, |
4346 | unsigned* prologSize, |
4347 | unsigned* epilogSize, |
4348 | void** codeAddr, |
4349 | void** coldCodeAddr, |
4350 | void** consAddr) |
4351 | { |
4352 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4353 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
4354 | { |
4355 | printf("*************** In emitEndCodeGen()\n" ); |
4356 | } |
4357 | #endif |
4358 | |
4359 | BYTE* consBlock; |
4360 | BYTE* codeBlock; |
4361 | BYTE* coldCodeBlock; |
4362 | BYTE* cp; |
4363 | |
4364 | assert(emitCurIG == nullptr); |
4365 | |
4366 | emitCodeBlock = nullptr; |
4367 | emitConsBlock = nullptr; |
4368 | |
4369 | /* Tell everyone whether we have fully interruptible code or not */ |
4370 | |
4371 | emitFullyInt = fullyInt; |
4372 | emitFullGCinfo = fullPtrMap; |
4373 | |
4374 | #ifndef UNIX_X86_ABI |
4375 | emitFullArgInfo = !emitHasFramePtr; |
4376 | #else |
4377 | emitFullArgInfo = fullPtrMap; |
4378 | #endif |
4379 | |
4380 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
4381 | GCrefsTable.record(emitGCrFrameOffsCnt); |
4382 | emitSizeTable.record(static_cast<unsigned>(emitSizeMethod)); |
4383 | stkDepthTable.record(emitMaxStackDepth); |
4384 | #endif // EMITTER_STATS |
4385 | |
4386 | // Default values, correct even if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH is 0. |
4387 | emitSimpleStkUsed = true; |
4388 | u1.emitSimpleStkMask = 0; |
4389 | u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask = 0; |
4390 | |
4391 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
4392 | /* Convert max. stack depth from # of bytes to # of entries */ |
4393 | |
4394 | unsigned maxStackDepthIn4ByteElements = emitMaxStackDepth / sizeof(int); |
4395 | JITDUMP("Converting emitMaxStackDepth from bytes (%d) to elements (%d)\n" , emitMaxStackDepth, |
4396 | maxStackDepthIn4ByteElements); |
4397 | emitMaxStackDepth = maxStackDepthIn4ByteElements; |
4398 | |
4399 | /* Should we use the simple stack */ |
4400 | |
4401 | if (emitMaxStackDepth > MAX_SIMPLE_STK_DEPTH || emitFullGCinfo) |
4402 | { |
4403 | /* We won't use the "simple" argument table */ |
4404 | |
4405 | emitSimpleStkUsed = false; |
4406 | |
4407 | /* Allocate the argument tracking table */ |
4408 | |
4409 | if (emitMaxStackDepth <= sizeof(u2.emitArgTrackLcl)) |
4410 | { |
4411 | u2.emitArgTrackTab = (BYTE*)u2.emitArgTrackLcl; |
4412 | } |
4413 | else |
4414 | { |
4415 | u2.emitArgTrackTab = (BYTE*)emitGetMem(roundUp(emitMaxStackDepth)); |
4416 | } |
4417 | |
4418 | u2.emitArgTrackTop = u2.emitArgTrackTab; |
4419 | u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt = 0; |
4420 | } |
4421 | #endif |
4422 | |
4423 | if (emitEpilogCnt == 0) |
4424 | { |
4425 | /* No epilogs, make sure the epilog size is set to 0 */ |
4426 | |
4427 | emitEpilogSize = 0; |
4428 | |
4429 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
4430 | emitExitSeqSize = 0; |
4431 | #endif // _TARGET_XARCH_ |
4432 | } |
4433 | |
4434 | /* Return the size of the epilog to the caller */ |
4435 | |
4436 | *epilogSize = emitEpilogSize; |
4437 | |
4438 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
4439 | *epilogSize += emitExitSeqSize; |
4440 | #endif // _TARGET_XARCH_ |
4441 | |
4442 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4443 | if (EMIT_INSTLIST_VERBOSE) |
4444 | { |
4445 | printf("\nInstruction list before instruction issue:\n\n" ); |
4446 | emitDispIGlist(true); |
4447 | } |
4448 | |
4449 | emitCheckIGoffsets(); |
4450 | #endif |
4451 | |
4452 | /* Allocate the code block (and optionally the data blocks) */ |
4453 | |
4454 | // If we're doing procedure splitting and we found cold blocks, then |
4455 | // allocate hot and cold buffers. Otherwise only allocate a hot |
4456 | // buffer. |
4457 | |
4458 | coldCodeBlock = nullptr; |
4459 | |
4460 | CorJitAllocMemFlag allocMemFlag = CORJIT_ALLOCMEM_DEFAULT_CODE_ALIGN; |
4461 | |
4462 | #ifdef _TARGET_X86_ |
4463 | // |
4464 | // These are the heuristics we use to decide whether or not to force the |
4465 | // code to be 16-byte aligned. |
4466 | // |
4467 | // 1. For ngen code with IBC data, use 16-byte alignment if the method |
4468 | // has been called more than BB_VERY_HOT_WEIGHT times. |
4469 | // 2. For JITed code and ngen code without IBC data, use 16-byte alignment |
4470 | // when the code is 16 bytes or smaller. We align small getters/setters |
4471 | // because of they are penalized heavily on certain hardware when not 16-byte |
4472 | // aligned (VSWhidbey #373938). To minimize size impact of this optimization, |
4473 | // we do not align large methods because of the penalty is amortized for them. |
4474 | // |
4475 | if (emitComp->fgHaveProfileData()) |
4476 | { |
4477 | if (emitComp->fgCalledCount > (BB_VERY_HOT_WEIGHT * emitComp->fgProfileRunsCount())) |
4478 | { |
4479 | allocMemFlag = CORJIT_ALLOCMEM_FLG_16BYTE_ALIGN; |
4480 | } |
4481 | } |
4482 | else |
4483 | { |
4484 | if (emitTotalHotCodeSize <= 16) |
4485 | { |
4486 | allocMemFlag = CORJIT_ALLOCMEM_FLG_16BYTE_ALIGN; |
4487 | } |
4488 | } |
4489 | #endif |
4490 | |
4491 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM64_ |
4492 | // For arm64, we want to allocate JIT data always adjacent to code similar to what native compiler does. |
4493 | // This way allows us to use a single `ldr` to access such data like float constant/jmp table. |
4494 | if (emitTotalColdCodeSize > 0) |
4495 | { |
4496 | // JIT data might be far away from the cold code. |
4497 | NYI_ARM64("Need to handle fix-up to data from cold code." ); |
4498 | } |
4499 | |
4500 | UNATIVE_OFFSET roDataAlignmentDelta = 0; |
4501 | if (emitConsDsc.dsdOffs) |
4502 | { |
4503 | UNATIVE_OFFSET roDataAlignment = TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; // 8 Byte align by default. |
4504 | roDataAlignmentDelta = (UNATIVE_OFFSET)ALIGN_UP(emitTotalHotCodeSize, roDataAlignment) - emitTotalHotCodeSize; |
4505 | assert((roDataAlignmentDelta == 0) || (roDataAlignmentDelta == 4)); |
4506 | } |
4507 | emitCmpHandle->allocMem(emitTotalHotCodeSize + roDataAlignmentDelta + emitConsDsc.dsdOffs, emitTotalColdCodeSize, 0, |
4508 | xcptnsCount, allocMemFlag, (void**)&codeBlock, (void**)&coldCodeBlock, (void**)&consBlock); |
4509 | |
4510 | consBlock = codeBlock + emitTotalHotCodeSize + roDataAlignmentDelta; |
4511 | |
4512 | #else |
4513 | emitCmpHandle->allocMem(emitTotalHotCodeSize, emitTotalColdCodeSize, emitConsDsc.dsdOffs, xcptnsCount, allocMemFlag, |
4514 | (void**)&codeBlock, (void**)&coldCodeBlock, (void**)&consBlock); |
4515 | #endif |
4516 | |
4517 | // if (emitConsDsc.dsdOffs) |
4518 | // printf("Cons=%08X\n", consBlock); |
4519 | |
4520 | /* Give the block addresses to the caller and other functions here */ |
4521 | |
4522 | *codeAddr = emitCodeBlock = codeBlock; |
4523 | *coldCodeAddr = emitColdCodeBlock = coldCodeBlock; |
4524 | *consAddr = emitConsBlock = consBlock; |
4525 | |
4526 | /* Nothing has been pushed on the stack */ |
4527 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
4528 | |
4529 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
4530 | emitCurStackLvl = 0; |
4531 | #endif |
4532 | |
4533 | /* Assume no live GC ref variables on entry */ |
4534 | |
4535 | VarSetOps::ClearD(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars); // This is initialized to Empty at the start of codegen. |
4536 | emitThisGCrefRegs = emitThisByrefRegs = RBM_NONE; |
4537 | emitThisGCrefVset = true; |
4538 | |
4539 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4540 | |
4541 | emitIssuing = true; |
4542 | |
4543 | // We don't use these after this point |
4544 | |
4545 | VarSetOps::AssignNoCopy(emitComp, emitPrevGCrefVars, VarSetOps::UninitVal()); |
4546 | emitPrevGCrefRegs = emitPrevByrefRegs = 0xBAADFEED; |
4547 | |
4548 | VarSetOps::AssignNoCopy(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars, VarSetOps::UninitVal()); |
4549 | emitInitGCrefRegs = emitInitByrefRegs = 0xBAADFEED; |
4550 | |
4551 | #endif |
4552 | |
4553 | /* Initialize the GC ref variable lifetime tracking logic */ |
4554 | |
4555 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrSetInit(); |
4556 | |
4557 | emitSyncThisObjOffs = -1; /* -1 means no offset set */ |
4558 | emitSyncThisObjReg = REG_NA; /* REG_NA means not set */ |
4559 | |
4560 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
4561 | if (emitComp->lvaKeepAliveAndReportThis()) |
4562 | { |
4563 | assert(emitComp->lvaIsOriginalThisArg(0)); |
4564 | LclVarDsc* thisDsc = &emitComp->lvaTable[0]; |
4565 | |
4566 | /* If "this" (which is passed in as a register argument in REG_ARG_0) |
4567 | is enregistered, we normally spot the "mov REG_ARG_0 -> thisReg" |
4568 | in the prolog and note the location of "this" at that point. |
4569 | However, if 'this' is enregistered into REG_ARG_0 itself, no code |
4570 | will be generated in the prolog, so we explicitly need to note |
4571 | the location of "this" here. |
4572 | NOTE that we can do this even if "this" is not enregistered in |
4573 | REG_ARG_0, and it will result in more accurate "this" info over the |
4574 | prolog. However, as methods are not interruptible over the prolog, |
4575 | we try to save space by avoiding that. |
4576 | */ |
4577 | |
4578 | if (thisDsc->lvRegister) |
4579 | { |
4580 | emitSyncThisObjReg = thisDsc->lvRegNum; |
4581 | |
4582 | if (emitSyncThisObjReg == (int)REG_ARG_0 && |
4583 | (codeGen->intRegState.rsCalleeRegArgMaskLiveIn & genRegMask(REG_ARG_0))) |
4584 | { |
4585 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
4586 | { |
4587 | emitGCregLiveSet(GCT_GCREF, genRegMask(REG_ARG_0), |
4588 | emitCodeBlock, // from offset 0 |
4589 | true); |
4590 | } |
4591 | else |
4592 | { |
4593 | /* If emitFullGCinfo==false, the we don't use any |
4594 | regPtrDsc's and so explictly note the location |
4595 | of "this" in GCEncode.cpp |
4596 | */ |
4597 | } |
4598 | } |
4599 | } |
4600 | } |
4601 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
4602 | |
4603 | emitContTrkPtrLcls = contTrkPtrLcls; |
4604 | |
4605 | /* Are there any GC ref variables on the stack? */ |
4606 | |
4607 | if (emitGCrFrameOffsCnt) |
4608 | { |
4609 | size_t siz; |
4610 | unsigned cnt; |
4611 | unsigned num; |
4612 | LclVarDsc* dsc; |
4613 | int* tab; |
4614 | |
4615 | /* Allocate and clear emitGCrFrameLiveTab[]. This is the table |
4616 | mapping "stkOffs -> varPtrDsc". It holds a pointer to |
4617 | the liveness descriptor that was created when the |
4618 | variable became alive. When the variable becomes dead, the |
4619 | descriptor will be appended to the liveness descriptor list, and |
4620 | the entry in emitGCrFrameLiveTab[] will be made NULL. |
4621 | |
4622 | Note that if all GC refs are assigned consecutively, |
4623 | emitGCrFrameLiveTab[] can be only as big as the number of GC refs |
4624 | present, instead of lvaTrackedCount. |
4625 | */ |
4626 | |
4627 | siz = emitGCrFrameOffsCnt * sizeof(*emitGCrFrameLiveTab); |
4628 | emitGCrFrameLiveTab = (varPtrDsc**)emitGetMem(roundUp(siz)); |
4629 | memset(emitGCrFrameLiveTab, 0, siz); |
4630 | |
4631 | /* Allocate and fill in emitGCrFrameOffsTab[]. This is the table |
4632 | mapping "varIndex -> stkOffs". |
4633 | Non-ptrs or reg vars have entries of -1. |
4634 | Entries of Tracked stack byrefs have the lower bit set to 1. |
4635 | */ |
4636 | |
4637 | emitTrkVarCnt = cnt = emitComp->lvaTrackedCount; |
4638 | assert(cnt); |
4639 | emitGCrFrameOffsTab = tab = (int*)emitGetMem(cnt * sizeof(int)); |
4640 | |
4641 | memset(emitGCrFrameOffsTab, -1, cnt * sizeof(int)); |
4642 | |
4643 | /* Now fill in all the actual used entries */ |
4644 | |
4645 | for (num = 0, dsc = emitComp->lvaTable, cnt = emitComp->lvaCount; num < cnt; num++, dsc++) |
4646 | { |
4647 | if (!dsc->lvOnFrame || (dsc->lvIsParam && !dsc->lvIsRegArg)) |
4648 | { |
4649 | continue; |
4650 | } |
4651 | |
4652 | #if FEATURE_FIXED_OUT_ARGS |
4653 | if (num == emitComp->lvaOutgoingArgSpaceVar) |
4654 | { |
4655 | continue; |
4656 | } |
4657 | #endif // FEATURE_FIXED_OUT_ARGS |
4658 | |
4659 | int offs = dsc->lvStkOffs; |
4660 | |
4661 | /* Is it within the interesting range of offsets */ |
4662 | |
4663 | if (offs >= emitGCrFrameOffsMin && offs < emitGCrFrameOffsMax) |
4664 | { |
4665 | /* Are tracked stack ptr locals laid out contiguously? |
4666 | If not, skip non-ptrs. The emitter is optimized to work |
4667 | with contiguous ptrs, but for EditNContinue, the variables |
4668 | are laid out in the order they occur in the local-sig. |
4669 | */ |
4670 | |
4671 | if (!emitContTrkPtrLcls) |
4672 | { |
4673 | if (!emitComp->lvaIsGCTracked(dsc)) |
4674 | { |
4675 | continue; |
4676 | } |
4677 | } |
4678 | |
4679 | unsigned indx = dsc->lvVarIndex; |
4680 | |
4681 | assert(!dsc->lvRegister); |
4682 | assert(dsc->lvTracked); |
4683 | assert(dsc->lvRefCnt() != 0); |
4684 | |
4685 | assert(dsc->TypeGet() == TYP_REF || dsc->TypeGet() == TYP_BYREF); |
4686 | |
4687 | assert(indx < emitComp->lvaTrackedCount); |
4688 | |
4689 | // printf("Variable #%2u/%2u is at stack offset %d\n", num, indx, offs); |
4690 | |
4691 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
4692 | #ifndef WIN64EXCEPTIONS |
4693 | /* Remember the frame offset of the "this" argument for synchronized methods */ |
4694 | if (emitComp->lvaIsOriginalThisArg(num) && emitComp->lvaKeepAliveAndReportThis()) |
4695 | { |
4696 | emitSyncThisObjOffs = offs; |
4697 | offs |= this_OFFSET_FLAG; |
4698 | } |
4699 | #endif |
4700 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
4701 | |
4702 | if (dsc->TypeGet() == TYP_BYREF) |
4703 | { |
4704 | offs |= byref_OFFSET_FLAG; |
4705 | } |
4706 | tab[indx] = offs; |
4707 | } |
4708 | } |
4709 | } |
4710 | else |
4711 | { |
4712 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4713 | emitTrkVarCnt = 0; |
4714 | emitGCrFrameOffsTab = nullptr; |
4715 | #endif |
4716 | } |
4717 | |
4718 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4719 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
4720 | { |
4721 | printf("\n***************************************************************************\n" ); |
4722 | printf("Instructions as they come out of the scheduler\n\n" ); |
4723 | } |
4724 | #endif |
4725 | |
4726 | /* Issue all instruction groups in order */ |
4727 | cp = codeBlock; |
4728 | |
4729 | #define DEFAULT_CODE_BUFFER_INIT 0xcc |
4730 | |
4731 | for (insGroup* ig = emitIGlist; ig != nullptr; ig = ig->igNext) |
4732 | { |
4733 | assert(!(ig->igFlags & IGF_PLACEHOLDER)); // There better not be any placeholder groups left |
4734 | |
4735 | /* Is this the first cold block? */ |
4736 | if (ig == emitFirstColdIG) |
4737 | { |
4738 | assert(emitCurCodeOffs(cp) == emitTotalHotCodeSize); |
4739 | |
4740 | assert(coldCodeBlock); |
4741 | cp = coldCodeBlock; |
4742 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4743 | if (emitComp->opts.disAsm || emitComp->opts.dspEmit || emitComp->verbose) |
4744 | { |
4745 | printf("\n************** Beginning of cold code **************\n" ); |
4746 | } |
4747 | #endif |
4748 | } |
4749 | |
4750 | /* Are we overflowing? */ |
4751 | if (ig->igNext && (ig->igNum + 1 != ig->igNext->igNum)) |
4752 | { |
4753 | NO_WAY("Too many instruction groups" ); |
4754 | } |
4755 | |
4756 | // If this instruction group is returned to from a funclet implementing a finally, |
4757 | // on architectures where it is necessary generate GC info for the current instruction as |
4758 | // if it were the instruction following a call. |
4759 | emitGenGCInfoIfFuncletRetTarget(ig, cp); |
4760 | |
4761 | instrDesc* id = (instrDesc*)ig->igData; |
4762 | |
4763 | #ifdef DEBUG |
4764 | |
4765 | /* Print the IG label, but only if it is a branch label */ |
4766 | |
4767 | if (emitComp->opts.disAsm || emitComp->opts.dspEmit || emitComp->verbose) |
4768 | { |
4769 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
4770 | { |
4771 | printf("\n" ); |
4772 | emitDispIG(ig); // Display the flags, IG data, etc. |
4773 | } |
4774 | else |
4775 | { |
4776 | printf("\nG_M%03u_IG%02u:\n" , Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, ig->igNum); |
4777 | } |
4778 | } |
4779 | |
4780 | #endif // DEBUG |
4781 | |
4782 | BYTE* bp = cp; |
4783 | |
4784 | /* Record the actual offset of the block, noting the difference */ |
4785 | |
4786 | emitOffsAdj = ig->igOffs - emitCurCodeOffs(cp); |
4787 | assert(emitOffsAdj >= 0); |
4788 | |
4789 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
4790 | if ((emitOffsAdj != 0) && emitComp->verbose) |
4791 | { |
4792 | printf("Block predicted offs = %08X, actual = %08X -> size adj = %d\n" , ig->igOffs, emitCurCodeOffs(cp), |
4793 | emitOffsAdj); |
4794 | } |
4795 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
4796 | |
4797 | ig->igOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(cp); |
4798 | assert(IsCodeAligned(ig->igOffs)); |
4799 | |
4800 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
4801 | |
4802 | /* Set the proper stack level if appropriate */ |
4803 | |
4804 | if (ig->igStkLvl != emitCurStackLvl) |
4805 | { |
4806 | /* We are pushing stuff implicitly at this label */ |
4807 | |
4808 | assert((unsigned)ig->igStkLvl > (unsigned)emitCurStackLvl); |
4809 | emitStackPushN(cp, (ig->igStkLvl - (unsigned)emitCurStackLvl) / sizeof(int)); |
4810 | } |
4811 | |
4812 | #endif |
4813 | |
4814 | /* Update current GC information for non-overflow IG (not added implicitly by the emitter) */ |
4815 | |
4816 | if (!(ig->igFlags & IGF_EMIT_ADD)) |
4817 | { |
4818 | /* Is there a new set of live GC ref variables? */ |
4819 | |
4820 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_GC_VARS) |
4821 | { |
4822 | emitUpdateLiveGCvars(ig->igGCvars(), cp); |
4823 | } |
4824 | else if (!emitThisGCrefVset) |
4825 | { |
4826 | emitUpdateLiveGCvars(emitThisGCrefVars, cp); |
4827 | } |
4828 | |
4829 | /* Update the set of live GC ref registers */ |
4830 | |
4831 | { |
4832 | regMaskTP GCregs = ig->igGCregs; |
4833 | |
4834 | if (GCregs != emitThisGCrefRegs) |
4835 | { |
4836 | emitUpdateLiveGCregs(GCT_GCREF, GCregs, cp); |
4837 | } |
4838 | } |
4839 | |
4840 | /* Is there a new set of live byref registers? */ |
4841 | |
4842 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_BYREF_REGS) |
4843 | { |
4844 | unsigned byrefRegs = ig->igByrefRegs(); |
4845 | |
4846 | if (byrefRegs != emitThisByrefRegs) |
4847 | { |
4848 | emitUpdateLiveGCregs(GCT_BYREF, byrefRegs, cp); |
4849 | } |
4850 | } |
4851 | } |
4852 | else |
4853 | { |
4854 | // These are not set for "overflow" groups |
4855 | assert(!(ig->igFlags & IGF_GC_VARS)); |
4856 | assert(!(ig->igFlags & IGF_BYREF_REGS)); |
4857 | } |
4858 | |
4859 | /* Issue each instruction in order */ |
4860 | |
4861 | emitCurIG = ig; |
4862 | |
4863 | for (unsigned cnt = ig->igInsCnt; cnt; cnt--) |
4864 | { |
4865 | castto(id, BYTE*) += emitIssue1Instr(ig, id, &cp); |
4866 | } |
4867 | |
4868 | emitCurIG = nullptr; |
4869 | |
4870 | assert(ig->igSize >= cp - bp); |
4871 | |
4872 | // Is it the last ig in the hot part? |
4873 | bool lastHotIG = (emitFirstColdIG != nullptr && ig->igNext == emitFirstColdIG); |
4874 | if (lastHotIG) |
4875 | { |
4876 | unsigned actualHotCodeSize = emitCurCodeOffs(cp); |
4877 | unsigned allocatedHotCodeSize = emitTotalHotCodeSize; |
4878 | assert(actualHotCodeSize <= allocatedHotCodeSize); |
4879 | if (actualHotCodeSize < allocatedHotCodeSize) |
4880 | { |
4881 | // The allocated chunk is bigger than used, fill in unused space in it. |
4882 | unsigned unusedSize = allocatedHotCodeSize - emitCurCodeOffs(cp); |
4883 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < unusedSize; ++i) |
4884 | { |
4885 | *cp++ = DEFAULT_CODE_BUFFER_INIT; |
4886 | } |
4887 | assert(allocatedHotCodeSize == emitCurCodeOffs(cp)); |
4888 | } |
4889 | } |
4890 | |
4891 | assert((ig->igSize >= cp - bp) || lastHotIG); |
4892 | ig->igSize = (unsigned short)(cp - bp); |
4893 | } |
4894 | |
4895 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
4896 | assert(emitCurStackLvl == 0); |
4897 | #endif |
4898 | |
4899 | /* Output any initialized data we may have */ |
4900 | |
4901 | if (emitConsDsc.dsdOffs != 0) |
4902 | { |
4903 | emitOutputDataSec(&emitConsDsc, consBlock); |
4904 | } |
4905 | |
4906 | /* Make sure all GC ref variables are marked as dead */ |
4907 | |
4908 | if (emitGCrFrameOffsCnt != 0) |
4909 | { |
4910 | unsigned vn; |
4911 | int of; |
4912 | varPtrDsc** dp; |
4913 | |
4914 | for (vn = 0, of = emitGCrFrameOffsMin, dp = emitGCrFrameLiveTab; vn < emitGCrFrameOffsCnt; |
4915 | vn++, of += TARGET_POINTER_SIZE, dp++) |
4916 | { |
4917 | if (*dp) |
4918 | { |
4919 | emitGCvarDeadSet(of, cp, vn); |
4920 | } |
4921 | } |
4922 | } |
4923 | |
4924 | /* No GC registers are live any more */ |
4925 | |
4926 | if (emitThisByrefRegs) |
4927 | { |
4928 | emitUpdateLiveGCregs(GCT_BYREF, RBM_NONE, cp); |
4929 | } |
4930 | if (emitThisGCrefRegs) |
4931 | { |
4932 | emitUpdateLiveGCregs(GCT_GCREF, RBM_NONE, cp); |
4933 | } |
4934 | |
4935 | /* Patch any forward jumps */ |
4936 | |
4937 | if (emitFwdJumps) |
4938 | { |
4939 | for (instrDescJmp* jmp = emitJumpList; jmp != nullptr; jmp = jmp->idjNext) |
4940 | { |
4941 | #ifdef _TARGET_XARCH_ |
4942 | assert(jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_LABEL || jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_RWR_LABEL || jmp->idInsFmt() == IF_SWR_LABEL); |
4943 | #endif |
4944 | insGroup* tgt = jmp->idAddr()->iiaIGlabel; |
4945 | |
4946 | if (jmp->idjTemp.idjAddr == nullptr) |
4947 | { |
4948 | continue; |
4949 | } |
4950 | |
4951 | if (jmp->idjOffs != tgt->igOffs) |
4952 | { |
4953 | BYTE* adr = jmp->idjTemp.idjAddr; |
4954 | int adj = jmp->idjOffs - tgt->igOffs; |
4955 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
4956 | // On Arm, the offset is encoded in unit of 2 bytes. |
4957 | adj >>= 1; |
4958 | #endif |
4959 | |
4960 | #if DEBUG_EMIT |
4961 | if ((jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum == (unsigned)INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM) || (INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0)) |
4962 | { |
4963 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
4964 | printf("[5] This output is broken for ARM, since it doesn't properly decode the jump offsets of " |
4965 | "the instruction at adr\n" ); |
4966 | #endif |
4967 | |
4968 | if (INTERESTING_JUMP_NUM == 0) |
4969 | { |
4970 | printf("[5] Jump %u:\n" , jmp->idDebugOnlyInfo()->idNum); |
4971 | } |
4972 | |
4973 | if (jmp->idjShort) |
4974 | { |
4975 | printf("[5] Jump is at %08X\n" , (adr + 1 - emitCodeBlock)); |
4976 | printf("[5] Jump distance is %02X - %02X = %02X\n" , *(BYTE*)adr, adj, *(BYTE*)adr - adj); |
4977 | } |
4978 | else |
4979 | { |
4980 | printf("[5] Jump is at %08X\n" , (adr + 4 - emitCodeBlock)); |
4981 | printf("[5] Jump distance is %08X - %02X = %08X\n" , *(int*)adr, adj, *(int*)adr - adj); |
4982 | } |
4983 | } |
4984 | #endif // DEBUG_EMIT |
4985 | |
4986 | if (jmp->idjShort) |
4987 | { |
4988 | // Patch Forward Short Jump |
4989 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
4990 | #if defined(_TARGET_XARCH_) |
4991 | *(BYTE*)adr -= (BYTE)adj; |
4992 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
4993 | // The following works because the jump offset is in the low order bits of the instruction. |
4994 | // Presumably we could also just call "emitOutputLJ(NULL, adr, jmp)", like for long jumps? |
4995 | *(short int*)adr -= (short)adj; |
4996 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
4997 | assert(!jmp->idAddr()->iiaHasInstrCount()); |
4998 | emitOutputLJ(NULL, adr, jmp); |
4999 | #else |
5000 | #error Unsupported or unset target architecture |
5001 | #endif |
5002 | } |
5003 | else |
5004 | { |
5005 | // Patch Forward non-Short Jump |
5006 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
5007 | #if defined(_TARGET_XARCH_) |
5008 | *(int*)adr -= adj; |
5009 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARMARCH_) |
5010 | assert(!jmp->idAddr()->iiaHasInstrCount()); |
5011 | emitOutputLJ(NULL, adr, jmp); |
5012 | #else |
5013 | #error Unsupported or unset target architecture |
5014 | #endif |
5015 | } |
5016 | } |
5017 | } |
5018 | } |
5019 | |
5020 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5021 | if (emitComp->opts.disAsm) |
5022 | { |
5023 | printf("\n" ); |
5024 | } |
5025 | |
5026 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
5027 | { |
5028 | printf("Allocated method code size = %4u , actual size = %4u\n" , emitTotalCodeSize, cp - codeBlock); |
5029 | } |
5030 | #endif |
5031 | |
5032 | unsigned actualCodeSize = emitCurCodeOffs(cp); |
5033 | |
5034 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
5035 | totAllocdSize += emitTotalCodeSize; |
5036 | totActualSize += actualCodeSize; |
5037 | #endif |
5038 | |
5039 | // Fill in eventual unused space, but do not report this space as used. |
5040 | // If you add this padding during the emitIGlist loop, then it will |
5041 | // emit offsets after the loop with wrong value (for example for GC ref variables). |
5042 | unsigned unusedSize = emitTotalCodeSize - emitCurCodeOffs(cp); |
5043 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < unusedSize; ++i) |
5044 | { |
5045 | *cp++ = DEFAULT_CODE_BUFFER_INIT; |
5046 | } |
5047 | assert(emitTotalCodeSize == emitCurCodeOffs(cp)); |
5048 | |
5049 | // Total code size is sum of all IG->size and doesn't include padding in the last IG. |
5050 | emitTotalCodeSize = actualCodeSize; |
5051 | |
5052 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5053 | |
5054 | // Make sure these didn't change during the "issuing" phase |
5055 | |
5056 | assert(VarSetOps::MayBeUninit(emitPrevGCrefVars)); |
5057 | assert(emitPrevGCrefRegs == 0xBAADFEED); |
5058 | assert(emitPrevByrefRegs == 0xBAADFEED); |
5059 | |
5060 | assert(VarSetOps::MayBeUninit(emitInitGCrefVars)); |
5061 | assert(emitInitGCrefRegs == 0xBAADFEED); |
5062 | assert(emitInitByrefRegs == 0xBAADFEED); |
5063 | |
5064 | if (EMIT_INSTLIST_VERBOSE) |
5065 | { |
5066 | printf("\nLabels list after the end of codegen:\n\n" ); |
5067 | emitDispIGlist(false); |
5068 | } |
5069 | |
5070 | emitCheckIGoffsets(); |
5071 | |
5072 | #endif // DEBUG |
5073 | |
5074 | // Assign the real prolog size |
5075 | *prologSize = emitCodeOffset(emitPrologIG, emitPrologEndPos); |
5076 | |
5077 | /* Return the amount of code we've generated */ |
5078 | |
5079 | return actualCodeSize; |
5080 | } |
5081 | |
5082 | // See specification comment at the declaration. |
5083 | void emitter::emitGenGCInfoIfFuncletRetTarget(insGroup* ig, BYTE* cp) |
5084 | { |
5085 | #if FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS && defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
5086 | // We only emit this GC information on targets where finally's are implemented via funclets, |
5087 | // and the finally is invoked, during non-exceptional execution, via a branch with a predefined |
5088 | // link register, rather than a "true call" for which we would already generate GC info. Currently, |
5089 | // this means precisely ARM. |
5090 | if (ig->igFlags & IGF_FINALLY_TARGET) |
5091 | { |
5092 | // We don't actually have a call instruction in this case, so we don't have |
5093 | // a real size for that instruction. We'll use 1. |
5094 | emitStackPop(cp, /*isCall*/ true, /*callInstrSize*/ 1, /*args*/ 0); |
5095 | |
5096 | /* Do we need to record a call location for GC purposes? */ |
5097 | if (!emitFullGCinfo) |
5098 | { |
5099 | emitRecordGCcall(cp, /*callInstrSize*/ 1); |
5100 | } |
5101 | } |
5102 | #endif // FEATURE_EH_FUNCLETS && defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
5103 | } |
5104 | |
5105 | /***************************************************************************** |
5106 | * |
5107 | * We have an instruction in an insGroup and we need to know the |
5108 | * instruction number for this instruction |
5109 | */ |
5110 | |
5111 | unsigned emitter::emitFindInsNum(insGroup* ig, instrDesc* idMatch) |
5112 | { |
5113 | instrDesc* id = (instrDesc*)ig->igData; |
5114 | |
5115 | // Check if we are the first instruction in the group |
5116 | if (id == idMatch) |
5117 | { |
5118 | return 0; |
5119 | } |
5120 | |
5121 | /* Walk the list of instructions until we find a match */ |
5122 | unsigned insNum = 0; |
5123 | unsigned insRemaining = ig->igInsCnt; |
5124 | |
5125 | while (insRemaining > 0) |
5126 | { |
5127 | castto(id, BYTE*) += emitSizeOfInsDsc(id); |
5128 | insNum++; |
5129 | insRemaining--; |
5130 | |
5131 | if (id == idMatch) |
5132 | { |
5133 | return insNum; |
5134 | } |
5135 | } |
5136 | assert(!"emitFindInsNum failed" ); |
5137 | return -1; |
5138 | } |
5139 | |
5140 | /***************************************************************************** |
5141 | * |
5142 | * We've been asked for the code offset of an instruction but alas one or |
5143 | * more instruction sizes in the block have been mis-predicted, so we have |
5144 | * to find the true offset by looking for the instruction within the group. |
5145 | */ |
5146 | |
5147 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitter::emitFindOffset(insGroup* ig, unsigned insNum) |
5148 | { |
5149 | instrDesc* id = (instrDesc*)ig->igData; |
5150 | UNATIVE_OFFSET of = 0; |
5151 | |
5152 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5153 | /* Make sure we were passed reasonable arguments */ |
5154 | assert(ig && ig->igSelf == ig); |
5155 | assert(ig->igInsCnt >= insNum); |
5156 | #endif |
5157 | |
5158 | /* Walk the instruction list until all are counted */ |
5159 | |
5160 | while (insNum > 0) |
5161 | { |
5162 | of += emitInstCodeSz(id); |
5163 | |
5164 | castto(id, BYTE*) += emitSizeOfInsDsc(id); |
5165 | |
5166 | insNum--; |
5167 | } |
5168 | |
5169 | return of; |
5170 | } |
5171 | |
5172 | /***************************************************************************** |
5173 | * |
5174 | * Start generating a constant data section for the current |
5175 | * function. Returns the offset of the section in the appropriate data |
5176 | * block. |
5177 | */ |
5178 | |
5179 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitter::emitDataGenBeg(UNATIVE_OFFSET size, bool dblAlign, bool codeLtab) |
5180 | { |
5181 | unsigned secOffs; |
5182 | dataSection* secDesc; |
5183 | |
5184 | assert(emitDataSecCur == nullptr); |
5185 | |
5186 | /* The size better not be some kind of an odd thing */ |
5187 | |
5188 | assert(size && size % sizeof(int) == 0); |
5189 | |
5190 | /* Get hold of the current offset */ |
5191 | |
5192 | secOffs = emitConsDsc.dsdOffs; |
5193 | |
5194 | /* Are we require to align this request on an eight byte boundry? */ |
5195 | if (dblAlign && (secOffs % sizeof(double) != 0)) |
5196 | { |
5197 | /* Need to skip 4 bytes to honor dblAlign */ |
5198 | /* Must allocate a dummy 4 byte integer */ |
5199 | int zero = 0; |
5200 | emitDataGenBeg(4, false, false); |
5201 | emitDataGenData(0, &zero, 4); |
5202 | emitDataGenEnd(); |
5203 | |
5204 | /* Get the new secOffs */ |
5205 | secOffs = emitConsDsc.dsdOffs; |
5206 | /* Now it should be a multiple of 8 */ |
5207 | assert(secOffs % sizeof(double) == 0); |
5208 | } |
5209 | |
5210 | /* Advance the current offset */ |
5211 | |
5212 | emitConsDsc.dsdOffs += size; |
5213 | |
5214 | /* Allocate a data section descriptor and add it to the list */ |
5215 | |
5216 | secDesc = emitDataSecCur = (dataSection*)emitGetMem(roundUp(sizeof(*secDesc) + size)); |
5217 | |
5218 | secDesc->dsSize = size; |
5219 | |
5220 | secDesc->dsType = dataSection::data; |
5221 | |
5222 | secDesc->dsNext = nullptr; |
5223 | |
5224 | if (emitConsDsc.dsdLast) |
5225 | { |
5226 | emitConsDsc.dsdLast->dsNext = secDesc; |
5227 | } |
5228 | else |
5229 | { |
5230 | emitConsDsc.dsdList = secDesc; |
5231 | } |
5232 | emitConsDsc.dsdLast = secDesc; |
5233 | |
5234 | return secOffs; |
5235 | } |
5236 | |
5237 | // Start generating a constant data section for the current function |
5238 | // populated with BasicBlock references. |
5239 | // You can choose the references to be either absolute pointers, or |
5240 | // 4-byte relative addresses. |
5241 | // Currently the relative references are relative to the start of the |
5242 | // first block (this is somewhat arbitrary) |
5243 | |
5244 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitter::emitBBTableDataGenBeg(unsigned numEntries, bool relativeAddr) |
5245 | { |
5246 | unsigned secOffs; |
5247 | dataSection* secDesc; |
5248 | |
5249 | assert(emitDataSecCur == nullptr); |
5250 | |
5251 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emittedSize; |
5252 | |
5253 | if (relativeAddr) |
5254 | { |
5255 | emittedSize = numEntries * 4; |
5256 | } |
5257 | else |
5258 | { |
5259 | emittedSize = numEntries * TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
5260 | } |
5261 | |
5262 | /* Get hold of the current offset */ |
5263 | |
5264 | secOffs = emitConsDsc.dsdOffs; |
5265 | |
5266 | /* Advance the current offset */ |
5267 | |
5268 | emitConsDsc.dsdOffs += emittedSize; |
5269 | |
5270 | /* Allocate a data section descriptor and add it to the list */ |
5271 | |
5272 | secDesc = emitDataSecCur = (dataSection*)emitGetMem(roundUp(sizeof(*secDesc) + numEntries * sizeof(BasicBlock*))); |
5273 | |
5274 | secDesc->dsSize = emittedSize; |
5275 | |
5276 | secDesc->dsType = relativeAddr ? dataSection::blockRelative32 : dataSection::blockAbsoluteAddr; |
5277 | |
5278 | secDesc->dsNext = nullptr; |
5279 | |
5280 | if (emitConsDsc.dsdLast) |
5281 | { |
5282 | emitConsDsc.dsdLast->dsNext = secDesc; |
5283 | } |
5284 | else |
5285 | { |
5286 | emitConsDsc.dsdList = secDesc; |
5287 | } |
5288 | |
5289 | emitConsDsc.dsdLast = secDesc; |
5290 | |
5291 | return secOffs; |
5292 | } |
5293 | |
5294 | /***************************************************************************** |
5295 | * |
5296 | * Emit the given block of bits into the current data section. |
5297 | */ |
5298 | |
5299 | void emitter::emitDataGenData(unsigned offs, const void* data, size_t size) |
5300 | { |
5301 | assert(emitDataSecCur && (emitDataSecCur->dsSize >= offs + size)); |
5302 | |
5303 | assert(emitDataSecCur->dsType == dataSection::data); |
5304 | |
5305 | memcpy(emitDataSecCur->dsCont + offs, data, size); |
5306 | } |
5307 | |
5308 | /***************************************************************************** |
5309 | * |
5310 | * Emit the address of the given basic block into the current data section. |
5311 | */ |
5312 | |
5313 | void emitter::emitDataGenData(unsigned index, BasicBlock* label) |
5314 | { |
5315 | assert(emitDataSecCur != nullptr); |
5316 | assert(emitDataSecCur->dsType == dataSection::blockAbsoluteAddr || |
5317 | emitDataSecCur->dsType == dataSection::blockRelative32); |
5318 | |
5319 | unsigned emittedElemSize = emitDataSecCur->dsType == dataSection::blockAbsoluteAddr ? TARGET_POINTER_SIZE : 4; |
5320 | |
5321 | assert(emitDataSecCur->dsSize >= emittedElemSize * (index + 1)); |
5322 | |
5323 | ((BasicBlock**)(emitDataSecCur->dsCont))[index] = label; |
5324 | } |
5325 | |
5326 | /***************************************************************************** |
5327 | * |
5328 | * We're done generating a data section. |
5329 | */ |
5330 | |
5331 | void emitter::emitDataGenEnd() |
5332 | { |
5333 | |
5334 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5335 | assert(emitDataSecCur); |
5336 | emitDataSecCur = nullptr; |
5337 | #endif |
5338 | } |
5339 | |
5340 | /******************************************************************************** |
5341 | * Generates a data section constant |
5342 | * |
5343 | * Parameters: |
5344 | * cnsAddr - memory location containing constant value |
5345 | * cnsSize - size of constant in bytes |
5346 | * dblAlign - whether to double align the data section constant |
5347 | * |
5348 | * Returns constant number as offset into data section. |
5349 | */ |
5350 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitter::emitDataConst(const void* cnsAddr, unsigned cnsSize, bool dblAlign) |
5351 | { |
5352 | // When generating SMALL_CODE, we don't bother with dblAlign |
5353 | if (dblAlign && (emitComp->compCodeOpt() == Compiler::SMALL_CODE)) |
5354 | { |
5355 | dblAlign = false; |
5356 | } |
5357 | |
5358 | UNATIVE_OFFSET cnum = emitDataGenBeg(cnsSize, dblAlign, false); |
5359 | emitDataGenData(0, cnsAddr, cnsSize); |
5360 | emitDataGenEnd(); |
5361 | |
5362 | return cnum; |
5363 | } |
5364 | |
5365 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
5366 | // emitAnyConst: Create a data section constant of arbitrary size. |
5367 | // |
5368 | // Arguments: |
5369 | // cnsAddr - pointer to the data to be placed in the data section |
5370 | // cnsSize - size of the data |
5371 | // dblAlign - whether to align the data section to an 8 byte boundary |
5372 | // |
5373 | // Return Value: |
5374 | // A field handle representing the data offset to access the constant. |
5375 | // |
5376 | CORINFO_FIELD_HANDLE emitter::emitAnyConst(const void* cnsAddr, unsigned cnsSize, bool dblAlign) |
5377 | { |
5378 | UNATIVE_OFFSET cnum = emitDataConst(cnsAddr, cnsSize, dblAlign); |
5379 | return emitComp->eeFindJitDataOffs(cnum); |
5380 | } |
5381 | |
5382 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
5383 | // emitFltOrDblConst: Create a float or double data section constant. |
5384 | // |
5385 | // Arguments: |
5386 | // constValue - constant value |
5387 | // attr - constant size |
5388 | // |
5389 | // Return Value: |
5390 | // A field handle representing the data offset to access the constant. |
5391 | // |
5392 | // Notes: |
5393 | // If attr is EA_4BYTE then the double value is converted to a float value. |
5394 | // If attr is EA_8BYTE then 8 byte alignment is automatically requested. |
5395 | // |
5396 | CORINFO_FIELD_HANDLE emitter::emitFltOrDblConst(double constValue, emitAttr attr) |
5397 | { |
5398 | assert((attr == EA_4BYTE) || (attr == EA_8BYTE)); |
5399 | |
5400 | void* cnsAddr; |
5401 | float f; |
5402 | bool dblAlign; |
5403 | |
5404 | if (attr == EA_4BYTE) |
5405 | { |
5406 | f = forceCastToFloat(constValue); |
5407 | cnsAddr = &f; |
5408 | dblAlign = false; |
5409 | } |
5410 | else |
5411 | { |
5412 | cnsAddr = &constValue; |
5413 | dblAlign = true; |
5414 | } |
5415 | |
5416 | // Access to inline data is 'abstracted' by a special type of static member |
5417 | // (produced by eeFindJitDataOffs) which the emitter recognizes as being a reference |
5418 | // to constant data, not a real static field. |
5419 | |
5420 | UNATIVE_OFFSET cnsSize = (attr == EA_4BYTE) ? 4 : 8; |
5421 | UNATIVE_OFFSET cnum = emitDataConst(cnsAddr, cnsSize, dblAlign); |
5422 | return emitComp->eeFindJitDataOffs(cnum); |
5423 | } |
5424 | |
5425 | /***************************************************************************** |
5426 | * |
5427 | * Output the given data section at the specified address. |
5428 | */ |
5429 | |
5430 | void emitter::emitOutputDataSec(dataSecDsc* sec, BYTE* dst) |
5431 | { |
5432 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5433 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
5434 | { |
5435 | printf("\nEmitting data sections: %u total bytes\n" , sec->dsdOffs); |
5436 | } |
5437 | |
5438 | unsigned secNum = 0; |
5439 | #endif |
5440 | |
5441 | assert(dst); |
5442 | assert(sec->dsdOffs); |
5443 | assert(sec->dsdList); |
5444 | |
5445 | /* Walk and emit the contents of all the data blocks */ |
5446 | |
5447 | dataSection* dsc; |
5448 | |
5449 | for (dsc = sec->dsdList; dsc; dsc = dsc->dsNext) |
5450 | { |
5451 | size_t dscSize = dsc->dsSize; |
5452 | |
5453 | // absolute label table |
5454 | if (dsc->dsType == dataSection::blockAbsoluteAddr) |
5455 | { |
5456 | JITDUMP(" section %u, size %u, block absolute addr\n" , secNum++, dscSize); |
5457 | |
5458 | assert(dscSize && dscSize % TARGET_POINTER_SIZE == 0); |
5459 | size_t numElems = dscSize / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
5460 | target_size_t* bDst = (target_size_t*)dst; |
5461 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < numElems; i++) |
5462 | { |
5463 | BasicBlock* block = ((BasicBlock**)dsc->dsCont)[i]; |
5464 | |
5465 | // Convert the BasicBlock* value to an IG address |
5466 | insGroup* lab = (insGroup*)emitCodeGetCookie(block); |
5467 | |
5468 | // Append the appropriate address to the destination |
5469 | BYTE* target = emitOffsetToPtr(lab->igOffs); |
5470 | |
5471 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
5472 | target = (BYTE*)((size_t)target | 1); // Or in thumb bit |
5473 | #endif |
5474 | bDst[i] = (target_size_t)target; |
5475 | if (emitComp->opts.compReloc) |
5476 | { |
5477 | emitRecordRelocation(&(bDst[i]), target, IMAGE_REL_BASED_HIGHLOW); |
5478 | } |
5479 | |
5480 | JITDUMP(" " FMT_BB ": 0x%p\n" , block->bbNum, bDst[i]); |
5481 | } |
5482 | } |
5483 | // relative label table |
5484 | else if (dsc->dsType == dataSection::blockRelative32) |
5485 | { |
5486 | JITDUMP(" section %u, size %u, block relative addr\n" , secNum++, dscSize); |
5487 | |
5488 | unsigned elemSize = 4; |
5489 | size_t numElems = dscSize / 4; |
5490 | unsigned* uDst = (unsigned*)dst; |
5491 | insGroup* labFirst = (insGroup*)emitCodeGetCookie(emitComp->fgFirstBB); |
5492 | |
5493 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < numElems; i++) |
5494 | { |
5495 | BasicBlock* block = ((BasicBlock**)dsc->dsCont)[i]; |
5496 | |
5497 | // Convert the BasicBlock* value to an IG address |
5498 | insGroup* lab = (insGroup*)emitCodeGetCookie(block); |
5499 | |
5500 | assert(FitsIn<uint32_t>(lab->igOffs - labFirst->igOffs)); |
5501 | uDst[i] = lab->igOffs - labFirst->igOffs; |
5502 | |
5503 | JITDUMP(" " FMT_BB ": 0x%x\n" , block->bbNum, uDst[i]); |
5504 | } |
5505 | } |
5506 | else |
5507 | { |
5508 | JITDUMP(" section %u, size %u, raw data\n" , secNum++, dscSize); |
5509 | |
5510 | // Simple binary data: copy the bytes to the target |
5511 | assert(dsc->dsType == dataSection::data); |
5512 | |
5513 | memcpy(dst, dsc->dsCont, dscSize); |
5514 | |
5515 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5516 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
5517 | { |
5518 | printf(" " ); |
5519 | for (size_t i = 0; i < dscSize; i++) |
5520 | { |
5521 | printf("%02x " , dsc->dsCont[i]); |
5522 | if ((((i + 1) % 16) == 0) && (i + 1 != dscSize)) |
5523 | { |
5524 | printf("\n " ); |
5525 | } |
5526 | } |
5527 | printf("\n" ); |
5528 | } |
5529 | #endif // DEBUG |
5530 | } |
5531 | dst += dscSize; |
5532 | } |
5533 | } |
5534 | |
5535 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
5536 | /***************************************************************************** |
5537 | * |
5538 | * Record the fact that the given variable now contains a live GC ref. |
5539 | */ |
5540 | |
5541 | void emitter::emitGCvarLiveSet(int offs, GCtype gcType, BYTE* addr, ssize_t disp) |
5542 | { |
5543 | assert(emitIssuing); |
5544 | |
5545 | varPtrDsc* desc; |
5546 | |
5547 | assert((abs(offs) % TARGET_POINTER_SIZE) == 0); |
5548 | assert(needsGC(gcType)); |
5549 | |
5550 | /* Compute the index into the GC frame table if the caller didn't do it */ |
5551 | |
5552 | if (disp == -1) |
5553 | { |
5554 | disp = (offs - emitGCrFrameOffsMin) / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
5555 | } |
5556 | |
5557 | assert((size_t)disp < emitGCrFrameOffsCnt); |
5558 | |
5559 | /* Allocate a lifetime record */ |
5560 | |
5561 | desc = new (emitComp, CMK_GC) varPtrDsc; |
5562 | |
5563 | desc->vpdBegOfs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
5564 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5565 | desc->vpdEndOfs = 0xFACEDEAD; |
5566 | #endif |
5567 | |
5568 | desc->vpdVarNum = offs; |
5569 | |
5570 | desc->vpdNext = nullptr; |
5571 | |
5572 | #if !defined(JIT32_GCENCODER) || !defined(WIN64EXCEPTIONS) |
5573 | /* the lower 2 bits encode props about the stk ptr */ |
5574 | |
5575 | if (offs == emitSyncThisObjOffs) |
5576 | { |
5577 | desc->vpdVarNum |= this_OFFSET_FLAG; |
5578 | } |
5579 | #endif |
5580 | |
5581 | if (gcType == GCT_BYREF) |
5582 | { |
5583 | desc->vpdVarNum |= byref_OFFSET_FLAG; |
5584 | } |
5585 | |
5586 | /* Append the new entry to the end of the list */ |
5587 | if (codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrLast == nullptr) |
5588 | { |
5589 | assert(codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrList == nullptr); |
5590 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrList = codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrLast = desc; |
5591 | } |
5592 | else |
5593 | { |
5594 | assert(codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrList != nullptr); |
5595 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrLast->vpdNext = desc; |
5596 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcVarPtrLast = desc; |
5597 | } |
5598 | |
5599 | /* Record the variable descriptor in the table */ |
5600 | |
5601 | assert(emitGCrFrameLiveTab[disp] == nullptr); |
5602 | emitGCrFrameLiveTab[disp] = desc; |
5603 | |
5604 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5605 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
5606 | { |
5607 | printf("[%08X] %s var born at [%s" , dspPtr(desc), GCtypeStr(gcType), emitGetFrameReg()); |
5608 | |
5609 | if (offs < 0) |
5610 | { |
5611 | printf("-%02XH" , -offs); |
5612 | } |
5613 | else if (offs > 0) |
5614 | { |
5615 | printf("+%02XH" , +offs); |
5616 | } |
5617 | |
5618 | printf("]\n" ); |
5619 | } |
5620 | #endif |
5621 | |
5622 | /* The "global" live GC variable mask is no longer up-to-date */ |
5623 | |
5624 | emitThisGCrefVset = false; |
5625 | } |
5626 | |
5627 | /***************************************************************************** |
5628 | * |
5629 | * Record the fact that the given variable no longer contains a live GC ref. |
5630 | */ |
5631 | |
5632 | void emitter::emitGCvarDeadSet(int offs, BYTE* addr, ssize_t disp) |
5633 | { |
5634 | assert(emitIssuing); |
5635 | |
5636 | varPtrDsc* desc; |
5637 | |
5638 | assert(abs(offs) % sizeof(int) == 0); |
5639 | |
5640 | /* Compute the index into the GC frame table if the caller didn't do it */ |
5641 | |
5642 | if (disp == -1) |
5643 | { |
5644 | disp = (offs - emitGCrFrameOffsMin) / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
5645 | } |
5646 | |
5647 | assert((unsigned)disp < emitGCrFrameOffsCnt); |
5648 | |
5649 | /* Get hold of the lifetime descriptor and clear the entry */ |
5650 | |
5651 | desc = emitGCrFrameLiveTab[disp]; |
5652 | emitGCrFrameLiveTab[disp] = nullptr; |
5653 | |
5654 | assert(desc); |
5655 | assert((desc->vpdVarNum & ~OFFSET_MASK) == (unsigned)offs); |
5656 | |
5657 | /* Record the death code offset */ |
5658 | |
5659 | assert(desc->vpdEndOfs == 0xFACEDEAD); |
5660 | desc->vpdEndOfs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
5661 | |
5662 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5663 | if (EMITVERBOSE) |
5664 | { |
5665 | GCtype gcType = (desc->vpdVarNum & byref_OFFSET_FLAG) ? GCT_BYREF : GCT_GCREF; |
5666 | #if !defined(JIT32_GCENCODER) || !defined(WIN64EXCEPTIONS) |
5667 | bool isThis = (desc->vpdVarNum & this_OFFSET_FLAG) != 0; |
5668 | |
5669 | printf("[%08X] %s%s var died at [%s" , dspPtr(desc), GCtypeStr(gcType), isThis ? "this-ptr" : "" , |
5670 | emitGetFrameReg()); |
5671 | #else |
5672 | bool isPinned = (desc->vpdVarNum & pinned_OFFSET_FLAG) != 0; |
5673 | |
5674 | printf("[%08X] %s%s var died at [%s" , dspPtr(desc), GCtypeStr(gcType), isPinned ? "pinned" : "" , |
5675 | emitGetFrameReg()); |
5676 | #endif |
5677 | |
5678 | if (offs < 0) |
5679 | { |
5680 | printf("-%02XH" , -offs); |
5681 | } |
5682 | else if (offs > 0) |
5683 | { |
5684 | printf("+%02XH" , +offs); |
5685 | } |
5686 | |
5687 | printf("]\n" ); |
5688 | } |
5689 | #endif |
5690 | |
5691 | /* The "global" live GC variable mask is no longer up-to-date */ |
5692 | |
5693 | emitThisGCrefVset = false; |
5694 | } |
5695 | |
5696 | /***************************************************************************** |
5697 | * |
5698 | * Record a new set of live GC ref variables. |
5699 | */ |
5700 | |
5701 | void emitter::emitUpdateLiveGCvars(VARSET_VALARG_TP vars, BYTE* addr) |
5702 | { |
5703 | assert(emitIssuing); |
5704 | |
5705 | // Don't track GC changes in epilogs |
5706 | if (emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG)) |
5707 | { |
5708 | return; |
5709 | } |
5710 | |
5711 | /* Is the current set accurate and unchanged? */ |
5712 | |
5713 | if (emitThisGCrefVset && VarSetOps::Equal(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars, vars)) |
5714 | { |
5715 | return; |
5716 | } |
5717 | |
5718 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5719 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
5720 | { |
5721 | printf("New GC ref live vars=%s " , VarSetOps::ToString(emitComp, vars)); |
5722 | dumpConvertedVarSet(emitComp, vars); |
5723 | printf("\n" ); |
5724 | } |
5725 | #endif |
5726 | |
5727 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitThisGCrefVars, vars); |
5728 | |
5729 | /* Are there any GC ref variables on the stack? */ |
5730 | |
5731 | if (emitGCrFrameOffsCnt) |
5732 | { |
5733 | int* tab; |
5734 | unsigned cnt = emitTrkVarCnt; |
5735 | unsigned num; |
5736 | |
5737 | /* Test all the tracked variable bits in the mask */ |
5738 | |
5739 | for (num = 0, tab = emitGCrFrameOffsTab; num < cnt; num++, tab++) |
5740 | { |
5741 | int val = *tab; |
5742 | |
5743 | if (val != -1) |
5744 | { |
5745 | // byref_OFFSET_FLAG and this_OFFSET_FLAG are set |
5746 | // in the table-offsets for byrefs and this-ptr |
5747 | |
5748 | int offs = val & ~OFFSET_MASK; |
5749 | |
5750 | // printf("var #%2u at %3d is now %s\n", num, offs, (vars & 1) ? "live" : "dead"); |
5751 | |
5752 | if (VarSetOps::IsMember(emitComp, vars, num)) |
5753 | { |
5754 | GCtype gcType = (val & byref_OFFSET_FLAG) ? GCT_BYREF : GCT_GCREF; |
5755 | emitGCvarLiveUpd(offs, INT_MAX, gcType, addr); |
5756 | } |
5757 | else |
5758 | { |
5759 | emitGCvarDeadUpd(offs, addr); |
5760 | } |
5761 | } |
5762 | } |
5763 | } |
5764 | |
5765 | emitThisGCrefVset = true; |
5766 | } |
5767 | |
5768 | /***************************************************************************** |
5769 | * |
5770 | * Record a call location for GC purposes (we know that this is a method that |
5771 | * will not be fully interruptible). |
5772 | */ |
5773 | |
5774 | void emitter::emitRecordGCcall(BYTE* codePos, unsigned char callInstrSize) |
5775 | { |
5776 | assert(emitIssuing); |
5777 | assert(!emitFullGCinfo); |
5778 | |
5779 | unsigned offs = emitCurCodeOffs(codePos); |
5780 | unsigned regs = (emitThisGCrefRegs | emitThisByrefRegs) & ~RBM_INTRET; |
5781 | callDsc* call; |
5782 | |
5783 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
5784 | // The JIT32 GCInfo encoder allows us to (as the comment previously here said): |
5785 | // "Bail if this is a totally boring call", but the GCInfoEncoder/Decoder interface |
5786 | // requires a definition for every call site, so we skip these "early outs" when we're |
5787 | // using the general encoder. |
5788 | if (regs == 0) |
5789 | { |
5790 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
5791 | if (emitCurStackLvl == 0) |
5792 | return; |
5793 | #endif |
5794 | /* Nope, only interesting calls get recorded */ |
5795 | |
5796 | if (emitSimpleStkUsed) |
5797 | { |
5798 | if (!u1.emitSimpleStkMask) |
5799 | return; |
5800 | } |
5801 | else |
5802 | { |
5803 | if (u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt == 0) |
5804 | return; |
5805 | } |
5806 | } |
5807 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
5808 | |
5809 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5810 | |
5811 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
5812 | { |
5813 | printf("; Call at %04X [stk=%u], GCvars=" , offs - callInstrSize, emitCurStackLvl); |
5814 | emitDispVarSet(); |
5815 | printf(", gcrefRegs=" ); |
5816 | printRegMaskInt(emitThisGCrefRegs); |
5817 | emitDispRegSet(emitThisGCrefRegs); |
5818 | // printRegMaskInt(emitThisGCrefRegs & ~RBM_INTRET & RBM_CALLEE_SAVED); // only display callee-saved |
5819 | // emitDispRegSet (emitThisGCrefRegs & ~RBM_INTRET & RBM_CALLEE_SAVED); // only display callee-saved |
5820 | printf(", byrefRegs=" ); |
5821 | printRegMaskInt(emitThisByrefRegs); |
5822 | emitDispRegSet(emitThisByrefRegs); |
5823 | // printRegMaskInt(emitThisByrefRegs & ~RBM_INTRET & RBM_CALLEE_SAVED); // only display callee-saved |
5824 | // emitDispRegSet (emitThisByrefRegs & ~RBM_INTRET & RBM_CALLEE_SAVED); // only display callee-saved |
5825 | printf("\n" ); |
5826 | } |
5827 | |
5828 | #endif |
5829 | |
5830 | /* Allocate a 'call site' descriptor and start filling it in */ |
5831 | |
5832 | call = new (emitComp, CMK_GC) callDsc; |
5833 | |
5834 | call->cdBlock = nullptr; |
5835 | call->cdOffs = offs; |
5836 | #ifndef JIT32_GCENCODER |
5837 | call->cdCallInstrSize = callInstrSize; |
5838 | #endif |
5839 | call->cdNext = nullptr; |
5840 | |
5841 | call->cdGCrefRegs = (regMaskSmall)emitThisGCrefRegs; |
5842 | call->cdByrefRegs = (regMaskSmall)emitThisByrefRegs; |
5843 | |
5844 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
5845 | #ifndef UNIX_AMD64_ABI |
5846 | noway_assert(FitsIn<USHORT>(emitCurStackLvl / ((unsigned)sizeof(unsigned)))); |
5847 | #endif // UNIX_AMD64_ABI |
5848 | #endif |
5849 | |
5850 | // Append the call descriptor to the list */ |
5851 | if (codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescLast == nullptr) |
5852 | { |
5853 | assert(codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescList == nullptr); |
5854 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescList = codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescLast = call; |
5855 | } |
5856 | else |
5857 | { |
5858 | assert(codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescList != nullptr); |
5859 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescLast->cdNext = call; |
5860 | codeGen->gcInfo.gcCallDescLast = call; |
5861 | } |
5862 | |
5863 | /* Record the current "pending" argument list */ |
5864 | |
5865 | if (emitSimpleStkUsed) |
5866 | { |
5867 | /* The biggest call is less than MAX_SIMPLE_STK_DEPTH. So use |
5868 | small format */ |
5869 | |
5870 | call->u1.cdArgMask = u1.emitSimpleStkMask; |
5871 | call->u1.cdByrefArgMask = u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask; |
5872 | call->cdArgCnt = 0; |
5873 | } |
5874 | else |
5875 | { |
5876 | /* The current call has too many arguments, so we need to report the |
5877 | offsets of each individual GC arg. */ |
5878 | |
5879 | call->cdArgCnt = u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt; |
5880 | if (call->cdArgCnt == 0) |
5881 | { |
5882 | call->u1.cdArgMask = call->u1.cdByrefArgMask = 0; |
5883 | return; |
5884 | } |
5885 | |
5886 | call->cdArgTable = new (emitComp, CMK_GC) unsigned[u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt]; |
5887 | |
5888 | unsigned gcArgs = 0; |
5889 | unsigned stkLvl = emitCurStackLvl / sizeof(int); |
5890 | |
5891 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < stkLvl; i++) |
5892 | { |
5893 | GCtype gcType = (GCtype)u2.emitArgTrackTab[stkLvl - i - 1]; |
5894 | |
5895 | if (needsGC(gcType)) |
5896 | { |
5897 | call->cdArgTable[gcArgs] = i * TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
5898 | |
5899 | if (gcType == GCT_BYREF) |
5900 | { |
5901 | call->cdArgTable[gcArgs] |= byref_OFFSET_FLAG; |
5902 | } |
5903 | |
5904 | gcArgs++; |
5905 | } |
5906 | } |
5907 | |
5908 | assert(gcArgs == u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt); |
5909 | } |
5910 | } |
5911 | |
5912 | /***************************************************************************** |
5913 | * |
5914 | * Record a new set of live GC ref registers. |
5915 | */ |
5916 | |
5917 | void emitter::emitUpdateLiveGCregs(GCtype gcType, regMaskTP regs, BYTE* addr) |
5918 | { |
5919 | assert(emitIssuing); |
5920 | |
5921 | // Don't track GC changes in epilogs |
5922 | if (emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG)) |
5923 | { |
5924 | return; |
5925 | } |
5926 | |
5927 | regMaskTP life; |
5928 | regMaskTP dead; |
5929 | regMaskTP chg; |
5930 | |
5931 | #ifdef DEBUG |
5932 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
5933 | { |
5934 | printf("New %sReg live regs=" , GCtypeStr(gcType)); |
5935 | printRegMaskInt(regs); |
5936 | emitDispRegSet(regs); |
5937 | printf("\n" ); |
5938 | } |
5939 | #endif |
5940 | |
5941 | assert(needsGC(gcType)); |
5942 | |
5943 | regMaskTP& emitThisXXrefRegs = (gcType == GCT_GCREF) ? emitThisGCrefRegs : emitThisByrefRegs; |
5944 | regMaskTP& emitThisYYrefRegs = (gcType == GCT_GCREF) ? emitThisByrefRegs : emitThisGCrefRegs; |
5945 | assert(emitThisXXrefRegs != regs); |
5946 | |
5947 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
5948 | { |
5949 | /* Figure out which GC registers are becoming live/dead at this point */ |
5950 | |
5951 | dead = (emitThisXXrefRegs & ~regs); |
5952 | life = (~emitThisXXrefRegs & regs); |
5953 | |
5954 | /* Can't simultaneously become live and dead at the same time */ |
5955 | |
5956 | assert((dead | life) != 0); |
5957 | assert((dead & life) == 0); |
5958 | |
5959 | /* Compute the 'changing state' mask */ |
5960 | |
5961 | chg = (dead | life); |
5962 | |
5963 | do |
5964 | { |
5965 | regMaskTP bit = genFindLowestBit(chg); |
5966 | regNumber reg = genRegNumFromMask(bit); |
5967 | |
5968 | if (life & bit) |
5969 | { |
5970 | emitGCregLiveUpd(gcType, reg, addr); |
5971 | } |
5972 | else |
5973 | { |
5974 | emitGCregDeadUpd(reg, addr); |
5975 | } |
5976 | |
5977 | chg -= bit; |
5978 | } while (chg); |
5979 | |
5980 | assert(emitThisXXrefRegs == regs); |
5981 | } |
5982 | else |
5983 | { |
5984 | emitThisYYrefRegs &= ~regs; // Kill the regs from the other GC type (if live) |
5985 | emitThisXXrefRegs = regs; // Mark them as live in the requested GC type |
5986 | } |
5987 | |
5988 | // The 2 GC reg masks can't be overlapping |
5989 | |
5990 | assert((emitThisGCrefRegs & emitThisByrefRegs) == 0); |
5991 | } |
5992 | |
5993 | /***************************************************************************** |
5994 | * |
5995 | * Record the fact that the given register now contains a live GC ref. |
5996 | */ |
5997 | |
5998 | void emitter::emitGCregLiveSet(GCtype gcType, regMaskTP regMask, BYTE* addr, bool isThis) |
5999 | { |
6000 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6001 | assert(needsGC(gcType)); |
6002 | |
6003 | regPtrDsc* regPtrNext; |
6004 | |
6005 | assert(!isThis || emitComp->lvaKeepAliveAndReportThis()); |
6006 | // assert(emitFullyInt || isThis); |
6007 | assert(emitFullGCinfo); |
6008 | |
6009 | assert(((emitThisGCrefRegs | emitThisByrefRegs) & regMask) == 0); |
6010 | |
6011 | /* Allocate a new regptr entry and fill it in */ |
6012 | |
6013 | regPtrNext = codeGen->gcInfo.gcRegPtrAllocDsc(); |
6014 | regPtrNext->rpdGCtype = gcType; |
6015 | |
6016 | regPtrNext->rpdOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
6017 | regPtrNext->rpdArg = FALSE; |
6018 | regPtrNext->rpdCall = FALSE; |
6019 | regPtrNext->rpdIsThis = isThis; |
6020 | regPtrNext->rpdCompiler.rpdAdd = (regMaskSmall)regMask; |
6021 | regPtrNext->rpdCompiler.rpdDel = 0; |
6022 | } |
6023 | |
6024 | /***************************************************************************** |
6025 | * |
6026 | * Record the fact that the given register no longer contains a live GC ref. |
6027 | */ |
6028 | |
6029 | void emitter::emitGCregDeadSet(GCtype gcType, regMaskTP regMask, BYTE* addr) |
6030 | { |
6031 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6032 | assert(needsGC(gcType)); |
6033 | |
6034 | regPtrDsc* regPtrNext; |
6035 | |
6036 | // assert(emitFullyInt); |
6037 | assert(emitFullGCinfo); |
6038 | |
6039 | assert(((emitThisGCrefRegs | emitThisByrefRegs) & regMask) != 0); |
6040 | |
6041 | /* Allocate a new regptr entry and fill it in */ |
6042 | |
6043 | regPtrNext = codeGen->gcInfo.gcRegPtrAllocDsc(); |
6044 | regPtrNext->rpdGCtype = gcType; |
6045 | |
6046 | regPtrNext->rpdOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
6047 | regPtrNext->rpdCall = FALSE; |
6048 | regPtrNext->rpdIsThis = FALSE; |
6049 | regPtrNext->rpdArg = FALSE; |
6050 | regPtrNext->rpdCompiler.rpdAdd = 0; |
6051 | regPtrNext->rpdCompiler.rpdDel = (regMaskSmall)regMask; |
6052 | } |
6053 | |
6054 | /***************************************************************************** |
6055 | * |
6056 | * Emit an 8-bit integer as code. |
6057 | */ |
6058 | |
6059 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputByte(BYTE* dst, ssize_t val) |
6060 | { |
6061 | *castto(dst, unsigned char*) = (unsigned char)val; |
6062 | |
6063 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6064 | if (emitComp->opts.dspEmit) |
6065 | { |
6066 | printf("; emit_byte 0%02XH\n" , val & 0xFF); |
6067 | } |
6068 | #ifdef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6069 | // if we're emitting code bytes, ensure that we've already emitted the rex prefix! |
6070 | assert(((val & 0xFF00000000LL) == 0) || ((val & 0xFFFFFFFF00000000LL) == 0xFFFFFFFF00000000LL)); |
6071 | #endif // _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6072 | #endif |
6073 | |
6074 | return sizeof(unsigned char); |
6075 | } |
6076 | |
6077 | /***************************************************************************** |
6078 | * |
6079 | * Emit a 16-bit integer as code. |
6080 | */ |
6081 | |
6082 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputWord(BYTE* dst, ssize_t val) |
6083 | { |
6084 | MISALIGNED_WR_I2(dst, (short)val); |
6085 | |
6086 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6087 | if (emitComp->opts.dspEmit) |
6088 | { |
6089 | printf("; emit_word 0%02XH,0%02XH\n" , (val & 0xFF), (val >> 8) & 0xFF); |
6090 | } |
6091 | #ifdef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6092 | // if we're emitting code bytes, ensure that we've already emitted the rex prefix! |
6093 | assert(((val & 0xFF00000000LL) == 0) || ((val & 0xFFFFFFFF00000000LL) == 0xFFFFFFFF00000000LL)); |
6094 | #endif // _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6095 | #endif |
6096 | |
6097 | return sizeof(short); |
6098 | } |
6099 | |
6100 | /***************************************************************************** |
6101 | * |
6102 | * Emit a 32-bit integer as code. |
6103 | */ |
6104 | |
6105 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputLong(BYTE* dst, ssize_t val) |
6106 | { |
6107 | MISALIGNED_WR_I4(dst, (int)val); |
6108 | |
6109 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6110 | if (emitComp->opts.dspEmit) |
6111 | { |
6112 | printf("; emit_long 0%08XH\n" , (int)val); |
6113 | } |
6114 | #ifdef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6115 | // if we're emitting code bytes, ensure that we've already emitted the rex prefix! |
6116 | assert(((val & 0xFF00000000LL) == 0) || ((val & 0xFFFFFFFF00000000LL) == 0xFFFFFFFF00000000LL)); |
6117 | #endif // _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6118 | #endif |
6119 | |
6120 | return sizeof(int); |
6121 | } |
6122 | |
6123 | /***************************************************************************** |
6124 | * |
6125 | * Emit a pointer-sized integer as code. |
6126 | */ |
6127 | |
6128 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputSizeT(BYTE* dst, ssize_t val) |
6129 | { |
6130 | MISALIGNED_WR_ST(dst, val); |
6131 | |
6132 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6133 | if (emitComp->opts.dspEmit) |
6134 | { |
6135 | #ifdef _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6136 | printf("; emit_size_t 0%016llXH\n" , val); |
6137 | #else // _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6138 | printf("; emit_size_t 0%08XH\n" , val); |
6139 | #endif // _TARGET_AMD64_ |
6140 | } |
6141 | #endif // DEBUG |
6142 | |
6143 | return TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
6144 | } |
6145 | |
6146 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
6147 | // Wrappers to emitOutputByte, emitOutputWord, emitOutputLong, emitOutputSizeT |
6148 | // that take unsigned __int64 or size_t type instead of ssize_t. Used on RyuJIT/x86. |
6149 | // |
6150 | // Arguments: |
6151 | // dst - passed through |
6152 | // val - passed through |
6153 | // |
6154 | // Return Value: |
6155 | // Same as wrapped function. |
6156 | // |
6157 | |
6158 | #if defined(_TARGET_X86_) |
6159 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputByte(BYTE* dst, size_t val) |
6160 | { |
6161 | return emitOutputByte(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6162 | } |
6163 | |
6164 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputWord(BYTE* dst, size_t val) |
6165 | { |
6166 | return emitOutputWord(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6167 | } |
6168 | |
6169 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputLong(BYTE* dst, size_t val) |
6170 | { |
6171 | return emitOutputLong(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6172 | } |
6173 | |
6174 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputSizeT(BYTE* dst, size_t val) |
6175 | { |
6176 | return emitOutputSizeT(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6177 | } |
6178 | |
6179 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputByte(BYTE* dst, unsigned __int64 val) |
6180 | { |
6181 | return emitOutputByte(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6182 | } |
6183 | |
6184 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputWord(BYTE* dst, unsigned __int64 val) |
6185 | { |
6186 | return emitOutputWord(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6187 | } |
6188 | |
6189 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputLong(BYTE* dst, unsigned __int64 val) |
6190 | { |
6191 | return emitOutputLong(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6192 | } |
6193 | |
6194 | unsigned char emitter::emitOutputSizeT(BYTE* dst, unsigned __int64 val) |
6195 | { |
6196 | return emitOutputSizeT(dst, (ssize_t)val); |
6197 | } |
6198 | #endif // defined(_TARGET_X86_) |
6199 | |
6200 | /***************************************************************************** |
6201 | * |
6202 | * Given a block cookie and a code position, return the actual code offset; |
6203 | * this can only be called at the end of code generation. |
6204 | */ |
6205 | |
6206 | UNATIVE_OFFSET emitter::emitCodeOffset(void* blockPtr, unsigned codePos) |
6207 | { |
6208 | insGroup* ig; |
6209 | |
6210 | UNATIVE_OFFSET of; |
6211 | unsigned no = emitGetInsNumFromCodePos(codePos); |
6212 | |
6213 | /* Make sure we weren't passed some kind of a garbage thing */ |
6214 | |
6215 | ig = (insGroup*)blockPtr; |
6216 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6217 | assert(ig && ig->igSelf == ig); |
6218 | #endif |
6219 | |
6220 | /* The first and last offsets are always easy */ |
6221 | |
6222 | if (no == 0) |
6223 | { |
6224 | of = 0; |
6225 | } |
6226 | else if (no == ig->igInsCnt) |
6227 | { |
6228 | of = ig->igSize; |
6229 | } |
6230 | else if (ig->igFlags & IGF_UPD_ISZ) |
6231 | { |
6232 | /* |
6233 | Some instruction sizes have changed, so we'll have to figure |
6234 | out the instruction offset "the hard way". |
6235 | */ |
6236 | |
6237 | of = emitFindOffset(ig, no); |
6238 | } |
6239 | else |
6240 | { |
6241 | /* All instructions correctly predicted, the offset stays the same */ |
6242 | |
6243 | of = emitGetInsOfsFromCodePos(codePos); |
6244 | |
6245 | // printf("[IG=%02u;ID=%03u;OF=%04X] <= %08X\n", ig->igNum, emitGetInsNumFromCodePos(codePos), of, codePos); |
6246 | |
6247 | /* Make sure the offset estimate is accurate */ |
6248 | |
6249 | assert(of == emitFindOffset(ig, emitGetInsNumFromCodePos(codePos))); |
6250 | } |
6251 | |
6252 | return ig->igOffs + of; |
6253 | } |
6254 | |
6255 | /***************************************************************************** |
6256 | * |
6257 | * Record the fact that the given register now contains a live GC ref. |
6258 | */ |
6259 | |
6260 | void emitter::emitGCregLiveUpd(GCtype gcType, regNumber reg, BYTE* addr) |
6261 | { |
6262 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6263 | |
6264 | // Don't track GC changes in epilogs |
6265 | if (emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG)) |
6266 | { |
6267 | return; |
6268 | } |
6269 | |
6270 | assert(needsGC(gcType)); |
6271 | |
6272 | regMaskTP regMask = genRegMask(reg); |
6273 | |
6274 | regMaskTP& emitThisXXrefRegs = (gcType == GCT_GCREF) ? emitThisGCrefRegs : emitThisByrefRegs; |
6275 | regMaskTP& emitThisYYrefRegs = (gcType == GCT_GCREF) ? emitThisByrefRegs : emitThisGCrefRegs; |
6276 | |
6277 | if ((emitThisXXrefRegs & regMask) == 0) |
6278 | { |
6279 | // If the register was holding the other GC type, that type should |
6280 | // go dead now |
6281 | |
6282 | if (emitThisYYrefRegs & regMask) |
6283 | { |
6284 | emitGCregDeadUpd(reg, addr); |
6285 | } |
6286 | |
6287 | // For synchronized methods, "this" is always alive and in the same register. |
6288 | // However, if we generate any code after the epilog block (where "this" |
6289 | // goes dead), "this" will come alive again. We need to notice that. |
6290 | // Note that we only expect isThis to be true at an insGroup boundary. |
6291 | |
6292 | bool isThis = (reg == emitSyncThisObjReg) ? true : false; |
6293 | |
6294 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6295 | { |
6296 | emitGCregLiveSet(gcType, regMask, addr, isThis); |
6297 | } |
6298 | |
6299 | emitThisXXrefRegs |= regMask; |
6300 | |
6301 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6302 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6303 | { |
6304 | printf("%sReg +[%s]\n" , GCtypeStr(gcType), emitRegName(reg)); |
6305 | } |
6306 | #endif |
6307 | } |
6308 | |
6309 | // The 2 GC reg masks can't be overlapping |
6310 | |
6311 | assert((emitThisGCrefRegs & emitThisByrefRegs) == 0); |
6312 | } |
6313 | |
6314 | /***************************************************************************** |
6315 | * |
6316 | * Record the fact that the given set of registers no longer contain live GC refs. |
6317 | */ |
6318 | |
6319 | void emitter::emitGCregDeadUpdMask(regMaskTP regs, BYTE* addr) |
6320 | { |
6321 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6322 | |
6323 | // Don't track GC changes in epilogs |
6324 | if (emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG)) |
6325 | { |
6326 | return; |
6327 | } |
6328 | |
6329 | // First, handle the gcref regs going dead |
6330 | |
6331 | regMaskTP gcrefRegs = emitThisGCrefRegs & regs; |
6332 | |
6333 | // "this" can never go dead in synchronized methods, except in the epilog |
6334 | // after the call to CORINFO_HELP_MON_EXIT. |
6335 | assert(emitSyncThisObjReg == REG_NA || (genRegMask(emitSyncThisObjReg) & regs) == 0); |
6336 | |
6337 | if (gcrefRegs) |
6338 | { |
6339 | assert((emitThisByrefRegs & gcrefRegs) == 0); |
6340 | |
6341 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6342 | { |
6343 | emitGCregDeadSet(GCT_GCREF, gcrefRegs, addr); |
6344 | } |
6345 | |
6346 | emitThisGCrefRegs &= ~gcrefRegs; |
6347 | |
6348 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6349 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6350 | { |
6351 | printf("gcrReg " ); |
6352 | printRegMaskInt(gcrefRegs); |
6353 | printf(" -" ); |
6354 | emitDispRegSet(gcrefRegs); |
6355 | printf("\n" ); |
6356 | } |
6357 | #endif |
6358 | } |
6359 | |
6360 | // Second, handle the byref regs going dead |
6361 | |
6362 | regMaskTP byrefRegs = emitThisByrefRegs & regs; |
6363 | |
6364 | if (byrefRegs) |
6365 | { |
6366 | assert((emitThisGCrefRegs & byrefRegs) == 0); |
6367 | |
6368 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6369 | { |
6370 | emitGCregDeadSet(GCT_BYREF, byrefRegs, addr); |
6371 | } |
6372 | |
6373 | emitThisByrefRegs &= ~byrefRegs; |
6374 | |
6375 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6376 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6377 | { |
6378 | printf("byrReg " ); |
6379 | printRegMaskInt(byrefRegs); |
6380 | printf(" -" ); |
6381 | emitDispRegSet(byrefRegs); |
6382 | printf("\n" ); |
6383 | } |
6384 | #endif |
6385 | } |
6386 | } |
6387 | |
6388 | /***************************************************************************** |
6389 | * |
6390 | * Record the fact that the given register no longer contains a live GC ref. |
6391 | */ |
6392 | |
6393 | void emitter::emitGCregDeadUpd(regNumber reg, BYTE* addr) |
6394 | { |
6395 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6396 | |
6397 | // Don't track GC changes in epilogs |
6398 | if (emitIGisInEpilog(emitCurIG)) |
6399 | { |
6400 | return; |
6401 | } |
6402 | |
6403 | regMaskTP regMask = genRegMask(reg); |
6404 | |
6405 | if ((emitThisGCrefRegs & regMask) != 0) |
6406 | { |
6407 | assert((emitThisByrefRegs & regMask) == 0); |
6408 | |
6409 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6410 | { |
6411 | emitGCregDeadSet(GCT_GCREF, regMask, addr); |
6412 | } |
6413 | |
6414 | emitThisGCrefRegs &= ~regMask; |
6415 | |
6416 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6417 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6418 | { |
6419 | printf("%s -[%s]\n" , "gcrReg" , emitRegName(reg)); |
6420 | } |
6421 | #endif |
6422 | } |
6423 | else if ((emitThisByrefRegs & regMask) != 0) |
6424 | { |
6425 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6426 | { |
6427 | emitGCregDeadSet(GCT_BYREF, regMask, addr); |
6428 | } |
6429 | |
6430 | emitThisByrefRegs &= ~regMask; |
6431 | |
6432 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6433 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6434 | { |
6435 | printf("%s -[%s]\n" , "byrReg" , emitRegName(reg)); |
6436 | } |
6437 | #endif |
6438 | } |
6439 | } |
6440 | |
6441 | /***************************************************************************** |
6442 | * |
6443 | * Record the fact that the given variable now contains a live GC ref. |
6444 | * varNum may be INT_MAX or negative (indicating a spill temp) only if |
6445 | * offs is guaranteed to be the offset of a tracked GC ref. Else we |
6446 | * need a valid value to check if the variable is tracked or not. |
6447 | */ |
6448 | |
6449 | void emitter::emitGCvarLiveUpd(int offs, int varNum, GCtype gcType, BYTE* addr) |
6450 | { |
6451 | assert(abs(offs) % sizeof(int) == 0); |
6452 | assert(needsGC(gcType)); |
6453 | |
6454 | #if FEATURE_FIXED_OUT_ARGS |
6455 | if ((unsigned)varNum == emitComp->lvaOutgoingArgSpaceVar) |
6456 | { |
6457 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6458 | { |
6459 | /* Append an "arg push" entry to track a GC written to the |
6460 | outgoing argument space. |
6461 | Allocate a new ptr arg entry and fill it in */ |
6462 | |
6463 | regPtrDsc* regPtrNext = gcInfo->gcRegPtrAllocDsc(); |
6464 | regPtrNext->rpdGCtype = gcType; |
6465 | regPtrNext->rpdOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
6466 | regPtrNext->rpdArg = TRUE; |
6467 | regPtrNext->rpdCall = FALSE; |
6468 | noway_assert(FitsIn<unsigned short>(offs)); |
6469 | regPtrNext->rpdPtrArg = (unsigned short)offs; |
6470 | regPtrNext->rpdArgType = (unsigned short)GCInfo::rpdARG_PUSH; |
6471 | regPtrNext->rpdIsThis = FALSE; |
6472 | |
6473 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6474 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6475 | { |
6476 | printf("[%04X] %s arg write\n" , offs, GCtypeStr(gcType)); |
6477 | } |
6478 | #endif |
6479 | } |
6480 | } |
6481 | else |
6482 | #endif // FEATURE_FIXED_OUT_ARGS |
6483 | { |
6484 | /* Is the frame offset within the "interesting" range? */ |
6485 | |
6486 | if (offs >= emitGCrFrameOffsMin && offs < emitGCrFrameOffsMax) |
6487 | { |
6488 | /* Normally all variables in this range must be tracked stack |
6489 | pointers. However, for EnC, we relax this condition. So we |
6490 | must check if this is not such a variable. |
6491 | Note that varNum might be negative, indicating a spill temp. |
6492 | */ |
6493 | |
6494 | if (varNum != INT_MAX) |
6495 | { |
6496 | bool isTracked = false; |
6497 | if (varNum >= 0) |
6498 | { |
6499 | // This is NOT a spill temp |
6500 | LclVarDsc* varDsc = &emitComp->lvaTable[varNum]; |
6501 | isTracked = emitComp->lvaIsGCTracked(varDsc); |
6502 | } |
6503 | else |
6504 | { |
6505 | // Is it an untracked spill temp? |
6506 | isTracked = TRACK_GC_TEMP_LIFETIMES; |
6507 | } |
6508 | if (!isTracked) |
6509 | { |
6510 | #if DOUBLE_ALIGN |
6511 | assert(!emitContTrkPtrLcls || |
6512 | // EBP based variables in the double-aligned frames are indeed input arguments. |
6513 | // and we don't require them to fall into the "interesting" range. |
6514 | ((emitComp->rpFrameType == FT_DOUBLE_ALIGN_FRAME) && (varNum >= 0) && |
6515 | (emitComp->lvaTable[varNum].lvFramePointerBased == 1))); |
6516 | #else |
6517 | assert(!emitContTrkPtrLcls); |
6518 | #endif |
6519 | return; |
6520 | } |
6521 | } |
6522 | |
6523 | size_t disp; |
6524 | |
6525 | /* Compute the index into the GC frame table */ |
6526 | |
6527 | disp = (offs - emitGCrFrameOffsMin) / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
6528 | assert(disp < emitGCrFrameOffsCnt); |
6529 | |
6530 | /* If the variable is currently dead, mark it as live */ |
6531 | |
6532 | if (emitGCrFrameLiveTab[disp] == nullptr) |
6533 | { |
6534 | emitGCvarLiveSet(offs, gcType, addr, disp); |
6535 | } |
6536 | } |
6537 | } |
6538 | } |
6539 | |
6540 | /***************************************************************************** |
6541 | * |
6542 | * Record the fact that the given variable no longer contains a live GC ref. |
6543 | */ |
6544 | |
6545 | void emitter::emitGCvarDeadUpd(int offs, BYTE* addr) |
6546 | { |
6547 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6548 | assert(abs(offs) % sizeof(int) == 0); |
6549 | |
6550 | /* Is the frame offset within the "interesting" range? */ |
6551 | |
6552 | if (offs >= emitGCrFrameOffsMin && offs < emitGCrFrameOffsMax) |
6553 | { |
6554 | size_t disp; |
6555 | |
6556 | /* Compute the index into the GC frame table */ |
6557 | |
6558 | disp = (offs - emitGCrFrameOffsMin) / TARGET_POINTER_SIZE; |
6559 | assert(disp < emitGCrFrameOffsCnt); |
6560 | |
6561 | /* If the variable is currently live, mark it as dead */ |
6562 | |
6563 | if (emitGCrFrameLiveTab[disp] != nullptr) |
6564 | { |
6565 | emitGCvarDeadSet(offs, addr, disp); |
6566 | } |
6567 | } |
6568 | } |
6569 | |
6570 | /***************************************************************************** |
6571 | * |
6572 | * Allocate a new IG and link it in to the global list after the current IG |
6573 | */ |
6574 | |
6575 | insGroup* emitter::emitAllocAndLinkIG() |
6576 | { |
6577 | insGroup* ig = emitAllocIG(); |
6578 | |
6579 | assert(emitCurIG); |
6580 | |
6581 | emitInsertIGAfter(emitCurIG, ig); |
6582 | |
6583 | /* Propagate some IG flags from the current group to the new group */ |
6584 | |
6585 | ig->igFlags |= (emitCurIG->igFlags & IGF_PROPAGATE_MASK); |
6586 | |
6587 | /* Set the new IG as the current IG */ |
6588 | |
6589 | emitCurIG = ig; |
6590 | |
6591 | return ig; |
6592 | } |
6593 | |
6594 | /***************************************************************************** |
6595 | * |
6596 | * Allocate an instruction group descriptor and assign it the next index. |
6597 | */ |
6598 | |
6599 | insGroup* emitter::emitAllocIG() |
6600 | { |
6601 | insGroup* ig; |
6602 | |
6603 | /* Allocate a group descriptor */ |
6604 | |
6605 | size_t sz = sizeof(insGroup); |
6606 | ig = (insGroup*)emitGetMem(sz); |
6607 | |
6608 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6609 | ig->igSelf = ig; |
6610 | #endif |
6611 | |
6612 | #if EMITTER_STATS |
6613 | emitTotalIGcnt += 1; |
6614 | emitTotalIGsize += sz; |
6615 | emitSizeMethod += sz; |
6616 | #endif |
6617 | |
6618 | /* Do basic initialization */ |
6619 | |
6620 | emitInitIG(ig); |
6621 | |
6622 | return ig; |
6623 | } |
6624 | |
6625 | /***************************************************************************** |
6626 | * |
6627 | * Initialize an instruction group |
6628 | */ |
6629 | |
6630 | void emitter::emitInitIG(insGroup* ig) |
6631 | { |
6632 | /* Assign the next available index to the instruction group */ |
6633 | |
6634 | ig->igNum = emitNxtIGnum; |
6635 | |
6636 | emitNxtIGnum++; |
6637 | |
6638 | /* Record the (estimated) code offset of the group */ |
6639 | |
6640 | ig->igOffs = emitCurCodeOffset; |
6641 | assert(IsCodeAligned(ig->igOffs)); |
6642 | |
6643 | /* Set the current function index */ |
6644 | |
6645 | ig->igFuncIdx = emitComp->compCurrFuncIdx; |
6646 | |
6647 | ig->igFlags = 0; |
6648 | |
6649 | /* Zero out some fields to avoid printing garbage in JitDumps. These |
6650 | really only need to be set in DEBUG, but do it in all cases to make |
6651 | sure we act the same in non-DEBUG builds. |
6652 | */ |
6653 | |
6654 | ig->igSize = 0; |
6655 | ig->igGCregs = RBM_NONE; |
6656 | ig->igInsCnt = 0; |
6657 | } |
6658 | |
6659 | /***************************************************************************** |
6660 | * |
6661 | * Insert instruction group 'ig' after 'igInsertAfterIG' |
6662 | */ |
6663 | |
6664 | void emitter::emitInsertIGAfter(insGroup* insertAfterIG, insGroup* ig) |
6665 | { |
6666 | assert(emitIGlist); |
6667 | assert(emitIGlast); |
6668 | |
6669 | ig->igNext = insertAfterIG->igNext; |
6670 | insertAfterIG->igNext = ig; |
6671 | |
6672 | if (emitIGlast == insertAfterIG) |
6673 | { |
6674 | // If we are inserting at the end, then update the 'last' pointer |
6675 | emitIGlast = ig; |
6676 | } |
6677 | } |
6678 | |
6679 | /***************************************************************************** |
6680 | * |
6681 | * Save the current IG and start a new one. |
6682 | */ |
6683 | |
6684 | void emitter::emitNxtIG(bool emitAdd) |
6685 | { |
6686 | /* Right now we don't allow multi-IG prologs */ |
6687 | |
6688 | assert(emitCurIG != emitPrologIG); |
6689 | |
6690 | /* First save the current group */ |
6691 | |
6692 | emitSavIG(emitAdd); |
6693 | |
6694 | /* Update the GC live sets for the group's start |
6695 | * Do it only if not an emitter added block */ |
6696 | |
6697 | if (!emitAdd) |
6698 | { |
6699 | VarSetOps::Assign(emitComp, emitInitGCrefVars, emitThisGCrefVars); |
6700 | emitInitGCrefRegs = emitThisGCrefRegs; |
6701 | emitInitByrefRegs = emitThisByrefRegs; |
6702 | } |
6703 | |
6704 | /* Start generating the new group */ |
6705 | |
6706 | emitNewIG(); |
6707 | |
6708 | /* If this is an emitter added block, flag it */ |
6709 | |
6710 | if (emitAdd) |
6711 | { |
6712 | emitCurIG->igFlags |= IGF_EMIT_ADD; |
6713 | } |
6714 | |
6715 | // We've created a new IG; no need to force another one. |
6716 | emitForceNewIG = false; |
6717 | } |
6718 | |
6719 | /***************************************************************************** |
6720 | * |
6721 | * emitGetInsSC: Get the instruction's constant value. |
6722 | */ |
6723 | |
6724 | target_ssize_t emitter::emitGetInsSC(instrDesc* id) |
6725 | { |
6726 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ // should it be _TARGET_ARMARCH_? Why do we need this? Note that on ARM64 we store scaled immediates |
6727 | // for some formats |
6728 | if (id->idIsLclVar()) |
6729 | { |
6730 | int varNum = id->idAddr()->iiaLclVar.lvaVarNum(); |
6731 | |
6732 | regNumber baseReg; |
6733 | int offs = id->idAddr()->iiaLclVar.lvaOffset(); |
6734 | #if defined(_TARGET_ARM_) |
6735 | int adr = |
6736 | emitComp->lvaFrameAddress(varNum, id->idIsLclFPBase(), &baseReg, offs, CodeGen::instIsFP(id->idIns())); |
6737 | int dsp = adr + offs; |
6738 | if ((id->idIns() == INS_sub) || (id->idIns() == INS_subw)) |
6739 | dsp = -dsp; |
6740 | #elif defined(_TARGET_ARM64_) |
6741 | // TODO-ARM64-Cleanup: this is currently unreachable. Do we need it? |
6742 | bool FPbased; |
6743 | int adr = emitComp->lvaFrameAddress(varNum, &FPbased); |
6744 | int dsp = adr + offs; |
6745 | if (id->idIns() == INS_sub) |
6746 | dsp = -dsp; |
6747 | #endif |
6748 | return dsp; |
6749 | } |
6750 | else |
6751 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
6752 | if (id->idIsLargeCns()) |
6753 | { |
6754 | return ((instrDescCns*)id)->idcCnsVal; |
6755 | } |
6756 | else |
6757 | { |
6758 | return id->idSmallCns(); |
6759 | } |
6760 | } |
6761 | |
6762 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
6763 | |
6764 | BYTE* emitter::emitGetInsRelocValue(instrDesc* id) |
6765 | { |
6766 | return ((instrDescReloc*)id)->idrRelocVal; |
6767 | } |
6768 | |
6769 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
6770 | |
6771 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
6772 | #if EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
6773 | /***************************************************************************** |
6774 | * |
6775 | * Record a push of a single dword on the stack. |
6776 | */ |
6777 | |
6778 | void emitter::emitStackPush(BYTE* addr, GCtype gcType) |
6779 | { |
6780 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6781 | assert(IsValidGCtype(gcType)); |
6782 | #endif |
6783 | |
6784 | if (emitSimpleStkUsed) |
6785 | { |
6786 | assert(!emitFullGCinfo); // Simple stk not used for emitFullGCinfo |
6787 | assert(emitCurStackLvl / sizeof(int) < MAX_SIMPLE_STK_DEPTH); |
6788 | |
6789 | u1.emitSimpleStkMask <<= 1; |
6790 | u1.emitSimpleStkMask |= (unsigned)needsGC(gcType); |
6791 | |
6792 | u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask <<= 1; |
6793 | u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask |= (gcType == GCT_BYREF); |
6794 | |
6795 | assert((u1.emitSimpleStkMask & u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask) == u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask); |
6796 | } |
6797 | else |
6798 | { |
6799 | emitStackPushLargeStk(addr, gcType); |
6800 | } |
6801 | |
6802 | emitCurStackLvl += sizeof(int); |
6803 | } |
6804 | |
6805 | /***************************************************************************** |
6806 | * |
6807 | * Record a push of a bunch of non-GC dwords on the stack. |
6808 | */ |
6809 | |
6810 | void emitter::emitStackPushN(BYTE* addr, unsigned count) |
6811 | { |
6812 | assert(count); |
6813 | |
6814 | if (emitSimpleStkUsed) |
6815 | { |
6816 | assert(!emitFullGCinfo); // Simple stk not used for emitFullGCinfo |
6817 | |
6818 | u1.emitSimpleStkMask <<= count; |
6819 | u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask <<= count; |
6820 | } |
6821 | else |
6822 | { |
6823 | emitStackPushLargeStk(addr, GCT_NONE, count); |
6824 | } |
6825 | |
6826 | emitCurStackLvl += count * sizeof(int); |
6827 | } |
6828 | |
6829 | /***************************************************************************** |
6830 | * |
6831 | * Record a pop of the given number of dwords from the stack. |
6832 | */ |
6833 | |
6834 | void emitter::emitStackPop(BYTE* addr, bool isCall, unsigned char callInstrSize, unsigned count) |
6835 | { |
6836 | assert(emitCurStackLvl / sizeof(int) >= count); |
6837 | assert(!isCall || callInstrSize > 0); |
6838 | |
6839 | if (count) |
6840 | { |
6841 | if (emitSimpleStkUsed) |
6842 | { |
6843 | assert(!emitFullGCinfo); // Simple stk not used for emitFullGCinfo |
6844 | |
6845 | unsigned cnt = count; |
6846 | |
6847 | do |
6848 | { |
6849 | u1.emitSimpleStkMask >>= 1; |
6850 | u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask >>= 1; |
6851 | } while (--cnt); |
6852 | } |
6853 | else |
6854 | { |
6855 | emitStackPopLargeStk(addr, isCall, callInstrSize, count); |
6856 | } |
6857 | |
6858 | emitCurStackLvl -= count * sizeof(int); |
6859 | } |
6860 | else |
6861 | { |
6862 | assert(isCall); |
6863 | |
6864 | // For the general encoder we do the call below always when it's a call, to ensure that the call is |
6865 | // recorded (when we're doing the ptr reg map for a non-fully-interruptible method). |
6866 | if (emitFullGCinfo |
6867 | #ifndef JIT32_GCENCODER |
6868 | || (emitComp->genFullPtrRegMap && (!emitComp->genInterruptible) && isCall) |
6869 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
6870 | ) |
6871 | { |
6872 | emitStackPopLargeStk(addr, isCall, callInstrSize, 0); |
6873 | } |
6874 | } |
6875 | } |
6876 | |
6877 | /***************************************************************************** |
6878 | * |
6879 | * Record a push of a single word on the stack for a full pointer map. |
6880 | */ |
6881 | |
6882 | void emitter::emitStackPushLargeStk(BYTE* addr, GCtype gcType, unsigned count) |
6883 | { |
6884 | S_UINT32 level(emitCurStackLvl / sizeof(int)); |
6885 | |
6886 | assert(IsValidGCtype(gcType)); |
6887 | assert(count); |
6888 | assert(!emitSimpleStkUsed); |
6889 | |
6890 | do |
6891 | { |
6892 | /* Push an entry for this argument on the tracking stack */ |
6893 | |
6894 | // printf("Pushed [%d] at lvl %2u [max=%u]\n", isGCref, emitArgTrackTop - emitArgTrackTab, emitMaxStackDepth); |
6895 | |
6896 | assert(level.IsOverflow() || u2.emitArgTrackTop == u2.emitArgTrackTab + level.Value()); |
6897 | *u2.emitArgTrackTop++ = (BYTE)gcType; |
6898 | assert(u2.emitArgTrackTop <= u2.emitArgTrackTab + emitMaxStackDepth); |
6899 | |
6900 | if (emitFullArgInfo || needsGC(gcType)) |
6901 | { |
6902 | if (emitFullGCinfo) |
6903 | { |
6904 | /* Append an "arg push" entry if this is a GC ref or |
6905 | FPO method. Allocate a new ptr arg entry and fill it in */ |
6906 | |
6907 | regPtrDsc* regPtrNext = codeGen->gcInfo.gcRegPtrAllocDsc(); |
6908 | regPtrNext->rpdGCtype = gcType; |
6909 | |
6910 | regPtrNext->rpdOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
6911 | regPtrNext->rpdArg = TRUE; |
6912 | regPtrNext->rpdCall = FALSE; |
6913 | if (level.IsOverflow() || !FitsIn<unsigned short>(level.Value())) |
6914 | { |
6915 | IMPL_LIMITATION("Too many/too big arguments to encode GC information" ); |
6916 | } |
6917 | regPtrNext->rpdPtrArg = (unsigned short)level.Value(); |
6918 | regPtrNext->rpdArgType = (unsigned short)GCInfo::rpdARG_PUSH; |
6919 | regPtrNext->rpdIsThis = FALSE; |
6920 | |
6921 | #ifdef DEBUG |
6922 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
6923 | { |
6924 | printf("[%08X] %s arg push %u\n" , dspPtr(regPtrNext), GCtypeStr(gcType), level.Value()); |
6925 | } |
6926 | #endif |
6927 | } |
6928 | |
6929 | /* This is an "interesting" argument push */ |
6930 | |
6931 | u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt++; |
6932 | } |
6933 | level += 1; |
6934 | assert(!level.IsOverflow()); |
6935 | } while (--count); |
6936 | } |
6937 | |
6938 | /***************************************************************************** |
6939 | * |
6940 | * Record a pop of the given number of words from the stack for a full ptr |
6941 | * map. |
6942 | */ |
6943 | |
6944 | void emitter::emitStackPopLargeStk(BYTE* addr, bool isCall, unsigned char callInstrSize, unsigned count) |
6945 | { |
6946 | assert(emitIssuing); |
6947 | |
6948 | unsigned argStkCnt; |
6949 | S_UINT16 argRecCnt(0); // arg count for ESP, ptr-arg count for EBP |
6950 | unsigned gcrefRegs, byrefRegs; |
6951 | |
6952 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
6953 | // For the general encoder, we always need to record calls, so we make this call |
6954 | // even when emitSimpleStkUsed is true. |
6955 | assert(!emitSimpleStkUsed); |
6956 | #endif |
6957 | |
6958 | /* Count how many pointer records correspond to this "pop" */ |
6959 | |
6960 | for (argStkCnt = count; argStkCnt; argStkCnt--) |
6961 | { |
6962 | assert(u2.emitArgTrackTop > u2.emitArgTrackTab); |
6963 | |
6964 | GCtype gcType = (GCtype)(*--u2.emitArgTrackTop); |
6965 | |
6966 | assert(IsValidGCtype(gcType)); |
6967 | |
6968 | // printf("Popped [%d] at lvl %u\n", GCtypeStr(gcType), emitArgTrackTop - emitArgTrackTab); |
6969 | |
6970 | // This is an "interesting" argument |
6971 | |
6972 | if (emitFullArgInfo || needsGC(gcType)) |
6973 | { |
6974 | argRecCnt += 1; |
6975 | } |
6976 | } |
6977 | |
6978 | assert(u2.emitArgTrackTop >= u2.emitArgTrackTab); |
6979 | assert(u2.emitArgTrackTop == u2.emitArgTrackTab + emitCurStackLvl / sizeof(int) - count); |
6980 | noway_assert(!argRecCnt.IsOverflow()); |
6981 | |
6982 | /* We're about to pop the corresponding arg records */ |
6983 | |
6984 | u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt -= argRecCnt.Value(); |
6985 | |
6986 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
6987 | // For the general encoder, we always have to record calls, so we don't take this early return. |
6988 | if (!emitFullGCinfo) |
6989 | return; |
6990 | #endif |
6991 | |
6992 | // Do we have any interesting (i.e., callee-saved) registers live here? |
6993 | |
6994 | gcrefRegs = byrefRegs = 0; |
6995 | |
6996 | // We make a bitmask whose bits correspond to callee-saved register indices (in the sequence |
6997 | // of callee-saved registers only). |
6998 | for (unsigned calleeSavedRegIdx = 0; calleeSavedRegIdx < CNT_CALLEE_SAVED; calleeSavedRegIdx++) |
6999 | { |
7000 | regMaskTP calleeSavedRbm = raRbmCalleeSaveOrder[calleeSavedRegIdx]; |
7001 | if (emitThisGCrefRegs & calleeSavedRbm) |
7002 | { |
7003 | gcrefRegs |= (1 << calleeSavedRegIdx); |
7004 | } |
7005 | if (emitThisByrefRegs & calleeSavedRbm) |
7006 | { |
7007 | byrefRegs |= (1 << calleeSavedRegIdx); |
7008 | } |
7009 | } |
7010 | |
7011 | #ifdef JIT32_GCENCODER |
7012 | // For the general encoder, we always have to record calls, so we don't take this early return. /* Are there any |
7013 | // args to pop at this call site? |
7014 | |
7015 | if (argRecCnt.Value() == 0) |
7016 | { |
7017 | /* |
7018 | Or do we have a partially interruptible EBP-less frame, and any |
7019 | of EDI,ESI,EBX,EBP are live, or is there an outer/pending call? |
7020 | */ |
7021 | CLANG_FORMAT_COMMENT_ANCHOR; |
7022 | |
7023 | #if !FPO_INTERRUPTIBLE |
7024 | if (emitFullyInt || (gcrefRegs == 0 && byrefRegs == 0 && u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt == 0)) |
7025 | #endif |
7026 | return; |
7027 | } |
7028 | #endif // JIT32_GCENCODER |
7029 | |
7030 | /* Only calls may pop more than one value */ |
7031 | // More detail: |
7032 | // _cdecl calls accomplish this popping via a post-call-instruction SP adjustment. |
7033 | // The "rpdCall" field below should be interpreted as "the instruction accomplishes |
7034 | // call-related popping, even if it's not itself a call". Therefore, we don't just |
7035 | // use the "isCall" input argument, which means that the instruction actually is a call -- |
7036 | // we use the OR of "isCall" or the "pops more than one value." |
7037 | |
7038 | bool isCallRelatedPop = (argRecCnt.Value() > 1); |
7039 | |
7040 | /* Allocate a new ptr arg entry and fill it in */ |
7041 | |
7042 | regPtrDsc* regPtrNext = codeGen->gcInfo.gcRegPtrAllocDsc(); |
7043 | regPtrNext->rpdGCtype = GCT_GCREF; // Pops need a non-0 value (??) |
7044 | |
7045 | regPtrNext->rpdOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
7046 | regPtrNext->rpdCall = (isCall || isCallRelatedPop); |
7047 | #ifndef JIT32_GCENCODER |
7048 | if (regPtrNext->rpdCall) |
7049 | { |
7050 | assert(isCall || callInstrSize == 0); |
7051 | regPtrNext->rpdCallInstrSize = callInstrSize; |
7052 | } |
7053 | #endif |
7054 | regPtrNext->rpdCallGCrefRegs = gcrefRegs; |
7055 | regPtrNext->rpdCallByrefRegs = byrefRegs; |
7056 | regPtrNext->rpdArg = TRUE; |
7057 | regPtrNext->rpdArgType = (unsigned short)GCInfo::rpdARG_POP; |
7058 | regPtrNext->rpdPtrArg = argRecCnt.Value(); |
7059 | |
7060 | #ifdef DEBUG |
7061 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
7062 | { |
7063 | printf("[%08X] ptr arg pop %u\n" , dspPtr(regPtrNext), count); |
7064 | } |
7065 | #endif |
7066 | } |
7067 | |
7068 | /***************************************************************************** |
7069 | * For caller-pop arguments, we report the arguments as pending arguments. |
7070 | * However, any GC arguments are now dead, so we need to report them |
7071 | * as non-GC. |
7072 | */ |
7073 | |
7074 | void emitter::emitStackKillArgs(BYTE* addr, unsigned count, unsigned char callInstrSize) |
7075 | { |
7076 | assert(count > 0); |
7077 | |
7078 | if (emitSimpleStkUsed) |
7079 | { |
7080 | assert(!emitFullGCinfo); // Simple stk not used for emitFullGCInfo |
7081 | |
7082 | /* We don't need to report this to the GC info, but we do need |
7083 | to kill mark the ptrs on the stack as non-GC */ |
7084 | |
7085 | assert(emitCurStackLvl / sizeof(int) >= count); |
7086 | |
7087 | for (unsigned lvl = 0; lvl < count; lvl++) |
7088 | { |
7089 | u1.emitSimpleStkMask &= ~(1 << lvl); |
7090 | u1.emitSimpleByrefStkMask &= ~(1 << lvl); |
7091 | } |
7092 | } |
7093 | else |
7094 | { |
7095 | BYTE* argTrackTop = u2.emitArgTrackTop; |
7096 | S_UINT16 gcCnt(0); |
7097 | |
7098 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < count; i++) |
7099 | { |
7100 | assert(argTrackTop > u2.emitArgTrackTab); |
7101 | |
7102 | --argTrackTop; |
7103 | |
7104 | GCtype gcType = (GCtype)(*argTrackTop); |
7105 | assert(IsValidGCtype(gcType)); |
7106 | |
7107 | if (needsGC(gcType)) |
7108 | { |
7109 | // printf("Killed %s at lvl %u\n", GCtypeStr(gcType), argTrackTop - emitArgTrackTab); |
7110 | |
7111 | *argTrackTop = GCT_NONE; |
7112 | gcCnt += 1; |
7113 | } |
7114 | } |
7115 | |
7116 | noway_assert(!gcCnt.IsOverflow()); |
7117 | |
7118 | /* We're about to kill the corresponding (pointer) arg records */ |
7119 | |
7120 | if (!emitFullArgInfo) |
7121 | { |
7122 | u2.emitGcArgTrackCnt -= gcCnt.Value(); |
7123 | } |
7124 | |
7125 | if (!emitFullGCinfo) |
7126 | { |
7127 | return; |
7128 | } |
7129 | |
7130 | /* Right after the call, the arguments are still sitting on the |
7131 | stack, but they are effectively dead. For fully-interruptible |
7132 | methods, we need to report that */ |
7133 | |
7134 | if (emitFullGCinfo && gcCnt.Value()) |
7135 | { |
7136 | /* Allocate a new ptr arg entry and fill it in */ |
7137 | |
7138 | regPtrDsc* regPtrNext = codeGen->gcInfo.gcRegPtrAllocDsc(); |
7139 | regPtrNext->rpdGCtype = GCT_GCREF; // Kills need a non-0 value (??) |
7140 | |
7141 | regPtrNext->rpdOffs = emitCurCodeOffs(addr); |
7142 | |
7143 | regPtrNext->rpdArg = TRUE; |
7144 | regPtrNext->rpdArgType = (unsigned short)GCInfo::rpdARG_KILL; |
7145 | regPtrNext->rpdPtrArg = gcCnt.Value(); |
7146 | |
7147 | #ifdef DEBUG |
7148 | if (EMIT_GC_VERBOSE) |
7149 | { |
7150 | printf("[%08X] ptr arg kill %u\n" , dspPtr(regPtrNext), count); |
7151 | } |
7152 | #endif |
7153 | } |
7154 | |
7155 | /* Now that ptr args have been marked as non-ptrs, we need to record |
7156 | the call itself as one that has no arguments. */ |
7157 | |
7158 | emitStackPopLargeStk(addr, true, callInstrSize, 0); |
7159 | } |
7160 | } |
7161 | |
7162 | /***************************************************************************** |
7163 | * A helper for recording a relocation with the EE. |
7164 | */ |
7165 | void emitter::emitRecordRelocation(void* location, /* IN */ |
7166 | void* target, /* IN */ |
7167 | WORD fRelocType, /* IN */ |
7168 | WORD slotNum /* = 0 */, /* IN */ |
7169 | INT32 addlDelta /* = 0 */) /* IN */ |
7170 | { |
7171 | assert(slotNum == 0); // It is unused on all supported platforms. |
7172 | |
7173 | // If we're an unmatched altjit, don't tell the VM anything. We still record the relocation for |
7174 | // late disassembly; maybe we'll need it? |
7175 | if (emitComp->info.compMatchedVM) |
7176 | { |
7177 | emitCmpHandle->recordRelocation(location, target, fRelocType, slotNum, addlDelta); |
7178 | } |
7179 | #if defined(LATE_DISASM) |
7180 | codeGen->getDisAssembler().disRecordRelocation((size_t)location, (size_t)target); |
7181 | #endif // defined(LATE_DISASM) |
7182 | } |
7183 | |
7184 | #ifdef _TARGET_ARM_ |
7185 | /***************************************************************************** |
7186 | * A helper for handling a Thumb-Mov32 of position-independent (PC-relative) value |
7187 | * |
7188 | * This routine either records relocation for the location with the EE, |
7189 | * or creates a virtual relocation entry to perform offset fixup during |
7190 | * compilation without recording it with EE - depending on which of |
7191 | * absolute/relocative relocations mode are used for code section. |
7192 | */ |
7193 | void emitter::emitHandlePCRelativeMov32(void* location, /* IN */ |
7194 | void* target) /* IN */ |
7195 | { |
7196 | if (emitComp->opts.jitFlags->IsSet(JitFlags::JIT_FLAG_RELATIVE_CODE_RELOCS)) |
7197 | { |
7198 | emitRecordRelocation(location, target, IMAGE_REL_BASED_REL_THUMB_MOV32_PCREL); |
7199 | } |
7200 | else |
7201 | { |
7202 | emitRecordRelocation(location, target, IMAGE_REL_BASED_THUMB_MOV32); |
7203 | } |
7204 | } |
7205 | #endif // _TARGET_ARM_ |
7206 | |
7207 | /***************************************************************************** |
7208 | * A helper for recording a call site with the EE. |
7209 | */ |
7210 | void emitter::emitRecordCallSite(ULONG instrOffset, /* IN */ |
7211 | CORINFO_SIG_INFO* callSig, /* IN */ |
7212 | CORINFO_METHOD_HANDLE methodHandle) /* IN */ |
7213 | { |
7214 | #if defined(DEBUG) |
7215 | // Since CORINFO_SIG_INFO is a heavyweight structure, in most cases we can |
7216 | // lazily obtain it here using the given method handle (we only save the sig |
7217 | // info when we explicitly need it, i.e. for CALLI calls, vararg calls, and |
7218 | // tail calls). |
7219 | if (callSig == nullptr) |
7220 | { |
7221 | assert(methodHandle != nullptr); |
7222 | |
7223 | if (Compiler::eeGetHelperNum(methodHandle) == CORINFO_HELP_UNDEF) |
7224 | { |
7225 | if (emitScratchSigInfo == nullptr) |
7226 | { |
7227 | emitScratchSigInfo = new (emitComp, CMK_CorSig) CORINFO_SIG_INFO; |
7228 | } |
7229 | |
7230 | emitComp->eeGetMethodSig(methodHandle, emitScratchSigInfo); |
7231 | callSig = emitScratchSigInfo; |
7232 | } |
7233 | } |
7234 | |
7235 | emitCmpHandle->recordCallSite(instrOffset, callSig, methodHandle); |
7236 | #endif // defined(DEBUG) |
7237 | } |
7238 | |
7239 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
7240 | #endif // EMIT_TRACK_STACK_DEPTH |
7241 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
7242 | /*****************************************************************************/ |
7243 | |
7244 | #ifdef DEBUG |
7245 | |
7246 | /***************************************************************************** |
7247 | * Given a code offset, return a string representing a label for that offset. |
7248 | * If the code offset is just after the end of the code of the function, the |
7249 | * label will be "END". If the code offset doesn't correspond to any known |
7250 | * offset, the label will be "UNKNOWN". The strings are returned from static |
7251 | * buffers. This function rotates amongst four such static buffers (there are |
7252 | * cases where this function is called four times to provide data for a single |
7253 | * printf()). |
7254 | */ |
7255 | |
7256 | const char* emitter::emitOffsetToLabel(unsigned offs) |
7257 | { |
7258 | const size_t TEMP_BUFFER_LEN = 40; |
7259 | static unsigned curBuf = 0; |
7260 | static char buf[4][TEMP_BUFFER_LEN]; |
7261 | char* retbuf; |
7262 | |
7263 | UNATIVE_OFFSET nextof = 0; |
7264 | |
7265 | for (insGroup* ig = emitIGlist; ig != nullptr; ig = ig->igNext) |
7266 | { |
7267 | // There is an eventual unused space after the last actual hot block |
7268 | // before the first allocated cold block. |
7269 | assert((nextof == ig->igOffs) || (ig == emitFirstColdIG)); |
7270 | |
7271 | if (ig->igOffs == offs) |
7272 | { |
7273 | // Found it! |
7274 | sprintf_s(buf[curBuf], TEMP_BUFFER_LEN, "G_M%03u_IG%02u" , Compiler::s_compMethodsCount, ig->igNum); |
7275 | retbuf = buf[curBuf]; |
7276 | curBuf = (curBuf + 1) % 4; |
7277 | return retbuf; |
7278 | } |
7279 | else if (ig->igOffs > offs) |
7280 | { |
7281 | // We went past the requested offset but didn't find it. |
7282 | sprintf_s(buf[curBuf], TEMP_BUFFER_LEN, "UNKNOWN" ); |
7283 | retbuf = buf[curBuf]; |
7284 | curBuf = (curBuf + 1) % 4; |
7285 | return retbuf; |
7286 | } |
7287 | |
7288 | nextof = ig->igOffs + ig->igSize; |
7289 | } |
7290 | |
7291 | if (nextof == offs) |
7292 | { |
7293 | // It's a pseudo-label to the end. |
7294 | sprintf_s(buf[curBuf], TEMP_BUFFER_LEN, "END" ); |
7295 | retbuf = buf[curBuf]; |
7296 | curBuf = (curBuf + 1) % 4; |
7297 | return retbuf; |
7298 | } |
7299 | else |
7300 | { |
7301 | sprintf_s(buf[curBuf], TEMP_BUFFER_LEN, "UNKNOWN" ); |
7302 | retbuf = buf[curBuf]; |
7303 | curBuf = (curBuf + 1) % 4; |
7304 | return retbuf; |
7305 | } |
7306 | } |
7307 | |
7308 | #endif // DEBUG |
7309 | |
7310 | //------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
7311 | // emitGetGCRegsSavedOrModified: Returns the set of registers that keeps gcrefs and byrefs across the call. |
7312 | // |
7313 | // Notes: it returns union of two sets: |
7314 | // 1) registers that could contain GC/byRefs before the call and call doesn't touch them; |
7315 | // 2) registers that contain GC/byRefs before the call and call modifies them, but they still |
7316 | // contain GC/byRefs. |
7317 | // |
7318 | // Arguments: |
7319 | // methHnd - the method handler of the call. |
7320 | // |
7321 | // Return value: |
7322 | // the saved set of registers. |
7323 | // |
7324 | regMaskTP emitter::emitGetGCRegsSavedOrModified(CORINFO_METHOD_HANDLE methHnd) |
7325 | { |
7326 | // Is it a helper with a special saved set? |
7327 | bool isNoGCHelper = emitNoGChelper(methHnd); |
7328 | if (isNoGCHelper) |
7329 | { |
7330 | CorInfoHelpFunc helpFunc = Compiler::eeGetHelperNum(methHnd); |
7331 | |
7332 | // Get the set of registers that this call kills and remove it from the saved set. |
7333 | regMaskTP savedSet = RBM_ALLINT & ~emitComp->compNoGCHelperCallKillSet(helpFunc); |
7334 | |
7335 | #ifdef DEBUG |
7336 | if (emitComp->verbose) |
7337 | { |
7338 | printf("NoGC Call: savedSet=" ); |
7339 | printRegMaskInt(savedSet); |
7340 | emitDispRegSet(savedSet); |
7341 | printf("\n" ); |
7342 | } |
7343 | #endif |
7344 | return savedSet; |
7345 | } |
7346 | else |
7347 | { |
7348 | // This is the saved set of registers after a normal call. |
7349 | return RBM_CALLEE_SAVED; |
7350 | } |
7351 | } |
7352 | |